HPLaser Jet3300MFPusersguide

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 258 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

use
hp LaserJet 3300mfp
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
hp LaserJet 3300mfp
user guide
EN 3
Contents
1 Getting to know your product
Identifying your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HP LaserJet 3300mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HP LaserJet 3300se mfp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HP LaserJet 3310mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
HP LaserJet 3320mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HP LaserJet 3320n mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
HP LaserJet 3330mfp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Identifying your product’s hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HP LaserJet 3300 series hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Identifying your product’s control panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fax controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Alphanumeric buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Menu and cancel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Copy, scan, and start controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Identifying your product’s software components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 Getting started
Finding a location for your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting a printer cable to your product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installing a print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installing and loading the media input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installing the ADF input tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Loading originals to copy or scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
To load originals into the ADF input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Verifying your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the copier using the ADF input tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
To self-test the copier using the flatbed scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To print a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3 Changing your product’s general default settings
HP LaserJet 3300 series product settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Printing a configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To print a configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Printing a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To print a control panel menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Restoring the factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
To restore the factory default settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Changing the display panel language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the display panel language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing the default paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the default paper size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the product’s volume controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the alarm volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To change the volume for the fax product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
4 EN
To change the ring volume of the fax product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
To change the control panel key press volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing settings from your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
To change default settings across all applications (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
To change default settings across all applications (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
To temporarily change settings from a software application (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
To temporarily change settings from a software application (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4 Printing
Printing with manual feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
To print using manual feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Stopping or canceling a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Understanding print quality settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
To temporarily change print quality settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
To change print quality settings for all future jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
To enable EconoMode (save toner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Optimizing print quality for media types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
To access the optimizing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Printing envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
To print one envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
To print multiple envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Printing transparencies and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
To print transparencies or labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Printing letterhead or preprinted forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
To print letterhead or preprinted forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Printing custom-sized media or card stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
To print custom-sized media or card stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
To duplex manually on lightweight media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
To duplex manually on heavy media or card stock (straight-through output path) . . . . . 51
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printing booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
To print booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Printing watermarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
To access the watermark feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5 Copying
Starting a copy job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Canceling a copy job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Adjusting copy quality for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
To adjust the copy quality for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Adjusting the default copy quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the copy quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To adjust the default lighter/darker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reducing or enlarging copies for the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adjusting the default copy size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
To change the default copy size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the copy collation setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
To change the copy collation setting for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
EN 5
To change the default copy collation setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the number of copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To change the number of copies for the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To change the default number of copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using HP LaserJet Copier software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
To access HP LaserJet Copier (Windows or Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy or scan a photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy a multiple page stack of 2-sided originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
To copy a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6 Scanning
Understanding scanning methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Scanning from the product’s control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
To scan from the product’s control panel using the start scan button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To use the scan to button via network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To reprogram the scan to button destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To reprogram the start scan button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Canceling a scan job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Scanning with the product software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To use page-by-page scanning (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To use page-by-page scanning (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
To use flatbed scanner preview scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Archiving scanned text or images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
To archive a scanned image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
To use the archive feature (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Scanning with OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To edit scanned text (Windows and Macintosh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To change the OCR word processing application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
To use HP LaserJet Director’s OCR feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Enhancing images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center . . . . . . . . . . 74
To access image enhancement features (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Adding annotations to HP documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
To access HP LaserJet Document Manager’s annotation features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
To change the annotation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding annotations to scanned image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sending scanned items as e-mail attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
To scan to e-mail (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
To scan to e-mail (Macintosh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
To e-mail scanned files in an alternative mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Scanner resolution and color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Resolution and color guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7 Faxing
Setting the information in the fax header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
To set the fax header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the answer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
To set the answer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
6 EN
Loading originals to fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To load fax documents into the ADF input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To send a fax to one recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
To send a fax to multiple recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
To send a fax using a group-dial code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
To send a fax to an ad hoc group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Canceling a fax job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To cancel the current fax job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To cancel a fax job using fax job status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using manual dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
To use manual dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Deleting faxes from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To delete faxes from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Redialing manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To redial manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sending a fax at a future time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To send a fax at a future time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To reprint a fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
To block or unblock fax numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Receiving faxes to your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
To turn the receive to PC setting off from the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
To delete speed-dial codes and one-touch keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
To quickly program speed-dial codes or one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
To program a one-touch key for alternate long distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Managing group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
To program group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
To delete group-dial codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
To delete an individual from a group-dial code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Deleting all phone book entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
To delete all phone book entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dialing character table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
To insert a pause or wait. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Inserting a dial prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
To set the dial prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using fax forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To use fax forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using fax polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To poll (request a fax from) another fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Enabling an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
To enable an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sending a fax by dialing from a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To send a fax by dialing from a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the HP LaserJet 3330 product’s volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To change the fax sounds (line monitor) volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
To change the ring volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing the default resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change the default resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the default contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change the default contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the detect dial tone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
To change detect dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
manuals4you.com
EN 7
Changing how the product answers incoming faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
To set the answer mode to automatic or manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changing rings-to-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
To set the number of rings-to-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Changing answer ring patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
What is ring pattern service?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How do I get the service? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How will I know if it is working? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
To change answer ring patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Changing the silence-detect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
To change the silence detect mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Changing autoreduction settings for incoming faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
To change autoreduction for incoming faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Enabling stamp received faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
To enable stamp received faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the fax error correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To change the error correction setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Selecting tone- or pulse-dialing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To select tone- or pulse-dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Changing redial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
To turn the redial on busy option on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn the redial on no answer on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Using billing codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn billing codes on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Changing the V.34 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
To turn the V.34 setting on or off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Managing fax logs and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Printing the fax activity log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
To print the fax activity log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Setting the fax activity log to print automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To set the fax activity log to print automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Printing a fax call report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To print a fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Setting fax call report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
To set fax call report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To include the first page of each fax on the fax call report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Printing a phone book report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To print a phone book report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Printing the billing codes report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
To print the billing codes report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing a T.30 protocol trace report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To print a T.30 protocol trace report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To set T.30 protocol trace report print times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing the block fax list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
To print the block fax list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Printing all fax reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
To print all fax reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8 Networking
Understanding the print server’s features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Using network protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Network connection requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Installing the 310x print server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
To connect the product to a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Installing the network software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
8 EN
Using the embedded web server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compatible web browsers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
To start the embedded web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using HP Web JetAdmin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Using BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Setting up the BOOTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Bootptab file entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
UNIX servers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Windows NT 4.0 servers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Windows 2000 servers:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuring the print server for DHCP configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Moving to another network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing a print server configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
To print a Jetdirect configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
For more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9 Cleaning and maintenance
Cleaning the outside of the product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
To clean the lid backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Cleaning the print cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
To clean the print cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning the printer media path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
To clean the printer media path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cleaning the pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
To clean the pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Changing the pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
To change the pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Changing the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
To change the printer separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing a new ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
To install a new or replacement ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10 Media
Product media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Supported media sizes (printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Guidelines for using media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Common media problems table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Card stock and heavy media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Selecting media for the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
11 HP parts and accessories
Ordering HP parts and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
HP parts and accessories chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Power modules (network model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HP LaserJet print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
EN 9
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
To install a print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Storing print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Print cartridge life expectancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Recycling print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Saving toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DIMMs (memory or font) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
To test a DIMM installation or removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
To install a DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
To remove a DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12 Troubleshooting printing problems
Product will not turn on or print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pages print but are totally blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pages did not print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Pages printed, but there was a problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Onscreen error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Paper handling problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Print is skewed (crooked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
More than one sheet feeds at one time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Product does not pull media from the media input tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Media curls when fed through product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Clearing media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
To clear a media jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
To clear other media jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tips to avoid media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Improving print quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Light print or fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Toner specks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gray background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Toner smear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Loose toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Vertical repetitive defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Misformed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Page skew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Curl or wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Wrinkles or creases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Toner scatter outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Control panel error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Critical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Alert messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
13 Troubleshooting copy problems
No copy came out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Copies are blank, or images are missing or faded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Improving copy quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Preventing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Clearing ADF media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
To clear a media jam from the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing a jammed ADF page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Identifying and correcting copy defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Vertical white or faded stripes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
10 EN
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Too light or dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unwanted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Black dots or streaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unclear text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Reduced size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14 Troubleshooting scanning problems
Scanned image is of poor quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Part of the image did not scan or text is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
The text cannot be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
The scan takes too long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Error messages appear on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
The scanner did nothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Improving scan quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Preventing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Identifying and correcting scan defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Too light or dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Unwanted lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Black dots or streaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Unclear text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Reduced size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
15 Troubleshooting faxing problems
Fax phone problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
The document stops feeding during faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Is the document too large or too small for the ADF?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Are there problems with the fax machine you are sending to? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Are there problems with the phone line?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
The product is receiving faxes but not sending them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is your product on a PBX system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is there a poor phone connection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Faxes you send are not arriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is the receiving fax machine off or does it have an error condition?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Is the fax still waiting in memory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Unable to start receiving faxes from an extension phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the extension phone setting disabled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the telephone cord securely connected?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Voice calls are not being received
by the phone or answering machine connected to the line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the phone cord connected properly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Are the answer mode and rings-to-answer settings set properly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answering machine or phone functioning? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Incoming fax calls are not being answered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answer mode set to manual? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the rings-to-answer setting set correctly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Is the answer ring pattern feature turned on? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the phone cord connected properly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is there a voice message being played by an answering machine?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Are there too many devices connected to the phone line? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the phone line working? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Is a voice messaging service interfering with the product answering calls? . . . . . . . . . 186
Is the product out of paper? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
EN 11
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Are you sending or receiving a very complex fax? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Does the receiving fax machine have a slow modem speed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the resolution at which the fax was sent or received very high? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is there a poor phone line connection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Faxes are not printing or are printing incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is there media in the media input tray? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the receive to PC option selected? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Faxes are printing on two pages instead of one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Is the autoreduction setting set correctly?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Received faxes are too light or are printing only on half of the page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Did the product run out of toner while printing a fax? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fax activity logs or call reports are not printing correctly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Are the activity log and call report settings correct? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
The volume is too high or low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Do the volume settings need to be adjusted?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
16 Troubleshooting network problems
Troubleshooting overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ON and READY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Is your printer ON and READY? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
USB OK? (USB light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
What is the state of the USB light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Check the print server’s I/O status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configuration page does not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Interpreting the configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
USB port information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Network statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
TCP/IP protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IPX/SPX protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Novell/NetWare protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
AppleTalk protocol information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
DLC/LLC protocol information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Browse hp.com . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Glossary
Appendix A
Specifications and regulatory information
HP LaserJet 3300 series product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
HP LaserJet 3300 series product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Laser safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
FCC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Canada DOC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Laser statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
12 EN
Korean EMI statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Japan VCCI Class B regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
HP LaserJet 3330 fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
HP LaserJet 3330 product fax specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Telephone consumer protection act (US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
IC CS-03 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Regulatory information for EU countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HP Jetdirect 310x print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HP Jetdirect 310x print server specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
FCC compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Japan VCCI Class 1 regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Korean EMI statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Chinese safety statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Protecting the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ozone production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Energy consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Toner consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Paper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
HP LaserJet printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
US returns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Non-US returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Material restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Material safety data sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Extended warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spare parts and consumables availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
For more information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Appendix B
Warranties and licensing
HP software license agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
HP limited warranty statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Appendix C
Service and support
Obtaining hardware service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
To obtain hardware service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Extended warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Service information form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Index
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
EN 13
1Getting to know your product
Use these topics to acquaint yourself with your new HP LaserJet 3300 series product:
●Identifying your product
●Identifying your product’s hardware components
●Identifying your product’s control panel components
●Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components
●Identifying your product’s software components
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
14 1 Getting to know your product EN
Identifying your product
Use these topics to learn about your product’s features and to make sure your package contents
are complete:
●HP LaserJet 3300mfp
●HP LaserJet 3300se mfp
●HP LaserJet 3310mfp
●HP LaserJet 3320mfp
●HP LaserJet 3320n mfp
●HP LaserJet 3330mfp
HP LaserJet 3300mfp
The HP LaserJet 3300mfp prints and copies up to 15 pages per minute (ppm) and comes
standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, 32 MB of RAM, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
slot for adding fonts and memory, a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray.
12
3
4
5
EN Identifying your product 15
HP LaserJet 3300se mfp
The HP LaserJet 3300se mfp prints and copies up to 15 pages per minute (ppm) and comes
standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, 32 MB of RAM ,, a dual in-line memory module (DIMM)
slot for adding fonts and memory, a USB 1.1 certified port, an IEEE 1284-B parallel port,
and specialized software. This product is available only in the U.S.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray.
12
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
16 1 Getting to know your product EN
HP LaserJet 3310mfp
The HP LaserJet 3310mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM , a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port. The HP LaserJet 3310 product has
no control panel scan buttons.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray.
Note Scanning with the HP LaserJet 3310 product can be done from your computer with the product
software.
12
3
4
56
EN Identifying your product 17
HP LaserJet 3320mfp
The HP LaserJet 3320mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM , a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet media input tray
and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray.
12
3
4
56
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
18 1 Getting to know your product EN
HP LaserJet 3320n mfp
The HP LaserJet 3320n mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM , a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
Ia USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
This product also includes networking capabilities and includes an HP Jetdirect 310x print server
for connecting to a 10Base-T or 100Base-Tx network (sometimes called Ethernet and Fast
Ethernet, respectively). The print server provides network solutions for communicating over
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Novell Netware, and AppleTalk protocols.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software, print server software, and electronic user guide;
5) 250-sheet media input tray and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray; 7) HP Jetdirect 310x print
server with mounting clip; 8) USB 2.0 certified cable; 9) print server power adapter.
12
3
4
5
6789
EN Identifying your product 19
HP LaserJet 3330mfp
The HP LaserJet 3330mfp is a copier-centric product that prints and copies up to 15 pages per
minute (ppm) and comes standard with a flatbed copier/scanner, a 50-page automatic document
feeder (ADF), 32 MB of RAM , a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot for adding fonts and memory,
a USB 1.1 certified port, and an IEEE 1284-B parallel port.
The 3330 also includes full-functionality fax capabilities with V.34 fax, including phone book, fax
polling, and delayed fax features.
Package contents: 1) Print cartridge; 2) power cord; 3) getting started guide and support flyer;
4) CD-ROM containing product software, fax software, and electronic user guide; 5) 250-sheet
media input tray and priority input tray; 6) ADF input tray; 7) fax guide; 8) phone cord.
12
3
4
5
67
8
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
20 1 Getting to know your product EN
Identifying your product’s hardware components
HP LaserJet 3300 series hardware components
1Printer control panel
2Print cartridge door
3ADF input tray
4Media input tray
5Priority input tray
6Flatbed scanner lid
7Left side panel
8Left side panel latch
9USB port
10 Parallel port
11 Power receptacle
12 Power switch (220V product)
13 Straight-through output door
1
2
33
4
5
6
78
12
9
10
11
13
EN Identifying your product’s control panel components 21
Identifying your product’s control panel components
Choose a section of the HP LaserJet 3300 control panel to display.
1Fax controls
2Alphanumeric buttons
3Menu and cancel controls
4Copy, scan, and start controls
Fax controls
Use the fax controls to send and receive faxes and to change commonly used fax settings. Fax
capability is available on the HP LaserJet 3330 product only. See Faxing for instructions on using
the fax controls.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
22 1 Getting to know your product EN
Alphanumeric buttons
If you have a fax model, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter data into the product’s display
screen and dial phone numbers for faxing. For information on using alphanumeric key characters
see Using dialing characters.
Note Keypad buttons are numeric on non-fax models.
Menu and cancel controls
Use these controls to choose menu options, determine the product’s status, and cancel the
current job.
EN Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components 23
Copy, scan, and start controls
Use these controls to change commonly used default settings, to start scanning, and to start
copying. For instructions on copying, see Copying. For instructions on scanning, see Scanning.
Identifying HP Jetdirect 310x print server components
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3320n model, an HP Jetdirect 310x print server was included
with it. The graphic below points out the main features of the print server. See Networking for
information about using the print server to connect the product to a network.
1 Test button
2 Network port
3 10 and 100 LED lights
4 Power outlet
5USB port
6 Status indicator lights
2
4
15
6
3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
24 1 Getting to know your product EN
Identifying your product’s software components
Note Software components installed depend on OS, installation type, and the HP LaserJet 3300.
Below are the software items included with your product:
●HP LaserJet Director
●HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer
●TWAIN Scan Driver
●HP LaserJet Fax
●HP LaserJet Configuration Utility
●HP Photo Center
●Read Iris OCR
●Uninstaller
EN 25
2Getting started
Use this information to perform basic assembly and installation tasks for your HP LaserJet 3300
series product:
●Finding a location for your product
●Connecting a printer cable to your product
●Installing a print cartridge
●Installing and loading the media input trays
●Installing the ADF input tray
●Connecting the power cord
●Loading originals to copy or scan
●Verifying your work
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
26 2 Getting started EN
Finding a location for your product
Install the product in a location that meets the following requirements:
●Situate the product on a sturdy, level surface out of direct sunlight and away from dust, open
flames, and ammonia fumes.
●Make sure the environment is well ventilated, free from abrupt temperature or humidity
changes, and within the following limits:
•Temperature: 15 to 32.5°C (59 to 90.5°F)
•Relative Humidity: 10 to 80% humidity (no condensation)
●Make sure that there is enough space around the product for media access and proper
ventilation; media fed into the straight-through media path will emerge behind the product.
74 cm (29 inches)
81 cm (32 inches)
53 cm (21 inches)
EN Connecting a printer cable to your product 27
Connecting a printer cable to your product
To connect a printer cable to your product, use the following steps:
Note
Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support USB cable
connections with the printer. Macintosh computers do not support
parallel cable connections.
1Open the print cartridge door by pulling the sides of the door
forward as shown.
2Open the product’s left side panel by pressing the release latch.
3Plug one end of the USB (1) or parallel cable (2) into the correct
socket inside the left side panel as shown.
4Thread the cable through the left side panel opening as shown, and
close the left side panel.
Note
If you are using a USB cable, it should be threaded through the upper
notch in the left side panel. If you are using a parallel cable, it should be
threaded through the lower notch.
1
2
3
12
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
28 2 Getting started EN
Installing a print cartridge
To install a print cartridge, use the following steps:
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
1Make sure the print cartridge door is open.
2Remove the print cartridge from its packaging, and locate the
sealing tape at the end of the cartridge.
3To remove the sealing tape from the cartridge, grasp the tape and
pull it straight out from the cartridge. Avoid touching any black toner
on the tape.
4Insert the cartridge as shown, with the arrows pointing into the
product.
5Close the print cartridge door. The print cartridge engages when
the door is closed.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print
cartridges, either new, refilled, or remanufactured. Since they are not
HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality.
4
2
3
1
5
EN Installing and loading the media input trays 29
Installing and loading the media input trays
To install and load the media input tray and the priority input tray, use
the following steps:
1Slide the trays in and down at an angle until they fit securely.
Remove the tape connecting the two trays.
2Remove the priority input tray.
3Push in the guides past the normal paper size mark.
4Roll the paper and place it in the tray.
5Push down on the paper so it lies flat in the tray.
6Push in the bottom guide so it is snug.
7Install the priority input tray over the media input tray.
Note
If the media guides are not sufficiently tight, your media may skew and
cause a media jam.
1
3
4
5
6
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
30 2 Getting started EN
Installing the ADF input tray
If your HP LaserJet 3300 series product comes with an ADF, or if you purchased the HP LaserJet
3300 series ADF accessory, use the following instructions to install the ADF input tray:
1Align the two tabs on the input tray with the two grooves in the ADF lid.
2Slide the tray into the grooves as shown until the tray snaps into place.
Connecting the power cord
To connect your product to a power source, use the following steps.
1If you have the 220V product, locate the power switch on the back of the product and make
sure the product is switched off.
2Connect the power cord to the product, as shown (1).
3Plug the other end of the power cord directly into a grounded AC outlet (2).
4If you have the 220V product, switch on the power. If you have the 110V product, there is no
power switch. It will automatically power on when it is plugged in.
Note HP does not recommend the use of uninterrupted power supply (UPS) battery backup devices or
surge suppressors with this product. Many surge suppressors and battery backups can cause print
defects.
1
2
EN Loading originals to copy or scan 31
Loading originals to copy or scan
Use these instructions to load originals into your HP LaserJet 3300 series product for copying or
scanning. For the best quality scans and copies, use the flatbed scanner. See Selecting media for
the ADF for guidelines on choosing original documents for scanning and copying.
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3300 product and want to purchase an ADF, see Ordering
HP parts and accessories for more information.
To load originals onto the flatbed scanner
1Make sure the ADF is free of media.
2Lift the flatbed scanner cover.
3Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the
document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
4Gently close the lid.
5The document is ready to be copied or scanned.
CAUTION To prevent damaging the product, do not allow the scanner lid to fall onto the flatbed scanner surface.
Always close the scanner lid when the product is not in use.
Top Edge
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
32 2 Getting started EN
To load originals into the ADF input tray
Note ADF capacity is up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20-pound) media (depending on the thickness of the
media), or until the ADF input tray is full.
The minimum size for media in the ADF is 127 x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches). For smaller sizes use the
flatbed scanner. The maximum size for media in the ADF is 215.9 mm wide by 381 mm long (8.5 x
15 inches).
1Make sure the flatbed scanner is free of media.
2Close the flatbed scanner cover and put the top end of the original media stack into the ADF
input tray, with the media stack face up and the first page to be scanned, copied, or faxed on
top of the stack.
3Slide the media stack into the ADF until the media does not move any farther.
4Adjust the media guides until they are snug.
5The document is now ready to be copied or scanned.
24
EN Verifying your work 33
Verifying your work
After setting up the product, verify your work by testing your HP LaserJet 3300 product’s printing
and copying functions.
To self-test the printer
To test the printer, use the following steps:
1On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Config Report and press menu/enter.
A configuration page prints, showing the product’s current configuration and the control panel
display returns to Ready. If the page does not print successfully, see Troubleshooting printing
problems.
To self-test the copier using the ADF input tray
Use the configuration page you just printed to test the copier.
1Adjust the guides on the ADF input tray to the size of the configuration page.
2Place the configuration page into the ADF input tray top first, print side up. Verify that the
control panel display reads Document Loaded.
3On the product’s control panel, press start/copy.
The product makes a copy of the configuration page and the control panel display returns to
Ready. If the page does not copy successfully, see Troubleshooting copy problems.
12
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
34 2 Getting started EN
To self-test the copier using the flatbed scanner
If your product does not have an ADF input tray, you can still test the copier by placing the
configuration page on the flatbed scanner.
1Place the configuration page face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the
document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
2Gently close the lid.
3On the product’s control panel, press start/copy.
The product makes a copy of the configuration page and the control panel display returns to
Ready. If the page does not copy successfully, see Troubleshooting copy problems.
CAUTION To prevent damaging the product, do not allow the scanner lid to fall onto the flatbed scanner surface.
Always close the scanner lid when the product is not in use.
To print a control panel menu map
In addition to printing a configuration page, you can also test your product by printing a menu map
that shows all of the control panel menu options.
To print a control panel menu map, use the following steps:
1On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Menu Structure and press menu/enter.
A menu map prints, showing all of the product’s control panel menu options. If the menu map does
not print successfully, see Troubleshooting printing problems.
EN 35
3Changing your product’s general
default settings
Use these topics to learn about your HP LaserJet 3300 series product’s general default settings,
how to check them, how to change them from the control panel, and how to access them using the
product software.
●HP LaserJet 3300 series product settings
●Printing a configuration page
●Printing a control panel menu map
●Restoring the factory default settings
●Changing the display panel language
●Changing the default paper size
●Using the product’s volume controls
●Changing settings from your computer
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
36 3 Changing your product’s general default settings EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product settings
Using the product software is often the easiest method to adjust your product settings. The
instructions in this section show how to access the device settings from both the control panel and
the product software.
CAUTION When changing certain settings in a network environment, you are changing settings for all users.
Printing a configuration page
You can see what product settings are currently selected by printing a configuration page.
To print a configuration page
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Config Report and press menu/enter.
The product exits the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing a control panel menu map
You can see all of your product’s control panel menu options by printing a control panel menu map.
To print a control panel menu map
1On the product’s control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Menu Structure and press menu/enter.
4A menu map prints, showing all of the product’s control panel menu options.
Restoring the factory default settings
This procedure returns all settings to the factory defaults and clears the fax header name and
phone number. (See Setting the information in the fax header for information on how to add your
information to the fax header.) This procedure clears fax numbers and names associated with
one-touch keys and speed-dial codes and deletes any pages stored in memory. The procedure
then automatically restarts the product.
To restore the factory default settings
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Service and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Restore Defaults, press menu/enter, and press
menu/enter again to confirm your selection.
4The product automatically restarts.
EN Changing the display panel language 37
Changing the display panel language
Use this procedure to have the control panel display messages and reports in a language other
than the default for your country/region.
To change the display panel language
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Language and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select the language you want.
5Press menu/enter to save your selection.
6The product automatically restarts.
Changing the default paper size
The paper size should be set to the size of paper you normally load in the paper input tray. The
product uses this setting for copying, printing reports, and determining autoreduction for incoming
faxes.
To change the default paper size
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Def. Paper Size and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button until the size of paper you have loaded appears. You can choose
Letter, Legal, or A4.
5Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Using the product’s volume controls
You can control the volume of the following sounds:
●The alarm sound the product emits when it requires attention, such as when the printer door is
open.
●The beeps emitted when you press control panel buttons.
●For the fax product, the phone line sounds for outgoing faxes.
●For the fax product, the ring volume for incoming faxes.
To change the alarm volume
The alarm is heard when the device is presenting an alert or critical error message. The alarm
duration length is either one or three seconds, based on the type of error.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
38 3 Changing your product’s general default settings EN
3Use the < and > buttons to select Volume Settings and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Alarm Volume.
5Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
6Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for the alarm volume is Soft.
To change the volume for the fax product
1Press Volume.
2Press the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
3Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the ring volume of the fax product
The ring volume is heard when the device is initially sending or receiving a call. The ring duration
length is based on the local telecom ring pattern length.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Volume Settings and press menu/enter.
4Press the < or > button once to select Ring Volume and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud, and press menu/enter to save
your selection.
Note The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the control panel key press volume
The key press volume controls the sound that is made when a control panel button is pressed.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Volume Settings and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Key Press Volume and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
6Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for the control panel key press volume is Soft.
Changing settings from your computer
After installation, you can gain access to printer settings from the product’s printer driver or from
another software application. These settings do not affect other users on a network.
EN Changing settings from your computer 39
Use one of the following methods to change your printer settings:
●To change default settings across all applications (Windows)
●To change default settings across all applications (Macintosh)
●To temporarily change settings from a software application (Windows)
●To temporarily change settings from a software application (Macintosh)
You can also change printer settings from the product software. For instructions on using the
product software, see the product software Help.
To change default settings across all applications (Windows)
Windows 95, 98, ME, and XP Home: From the Start menu, select Settings, and select Printers.
Right-click the printer icon and click Properties.
Windows NT 4.0 SP3, 2000, and XP Professional: From the Start menu, select Settings, and
select Printers. For Windows 2000 right-click the printer icon, and click Printing Preferences.
Note The actual steps may vary; these are the most common methods.
To change default settings across all applications (Macintosh)
Macintosh OS 9.1:
1From the Macintosh desktop, choose File. Then choose Print Desktop.
2In the printer group box, choose the HP All-in-one.
3Make the necessary changes to the settings.
4Click the Save Settings option.
5Click Cancel.
Macintosh OS X:
1Open a document in a text editing application.
2Choose File. Then choose Print.
3Make the appropriate changes to the default settings.
4On the settings options, choose to Save Custom Setting.
5To invoke the settings when printing a document, choose the Custom option in the Saved
Settings section.
To temporarily change settings from a software application
(Windows)
From the File menu, click Print. From the Print dialog, click Properties. Change the settings that
you want to apply for the current print job.
To temporarily change settings from a software application
(Macintosh)
From the File menu, choose Print. Use the Print dialog to set print options.
Note The actual steps may vary; these are the most common methods.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
40 3 Changing your product’s general default settings EN
EN 41
4Printing
Use these instructions to perform printing tasks with your HP LaserJet 3300 series product:
●Printing with manual feed
●Stopping or canceling a print job
●Printer drivers
●Understanding print quality settings
●Optimizing print quality for media types
●Printing envelopes
●Printing transparencies and labels
●Printing letterhead or preprinted forms
●Printing custom-sized media or card stock
●Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing)
●Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of media
●Printing booklets
●Printing watermarks
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
42 4 Printing EN
Printing with manual feed
You can use manual feed when printing mixed media, for example, an envelope, then a letter, then
an envelope, and so on. Load an envelope in the priority input tray and load letterhead in the main
input tray.
To print using manual feed
1Access the printer setup from your software application, and select Manual Feed from the
Source Tray drop-down list. (For instructions on accessing the printer setup from your
computer, see Changing settings from your computer.)
2After you have enabled the setting, wait until the display reads Manual Feed, then press
menu/enter to print each job.
Stopping or canceling a print job
If your print job is currently printing, you can cancel a print job by pressing cancel on the control
panel.
CAUTION Pressing cancel clears the job currently being processed by the product. If more than one process
is running, it clears the process that currently appears on the display panel.
Printer drivers
When you installed the product software, you selected one of the following printer drivers:
PCL 6 driver: Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the product’s features. Unless
complete backward compatibility with previous PCL drivers or older printers is necessary, the PCL
6 driver is recommended.
PCL 5e driver: Use the PCL 5e driver if you need print results to look consistent with those from
older HP LaserJet printers. Certain features (FastRes 1200, ProRes 1200, and 300 dpi) are not
available in this driver. (Do not use the PCL 5e driver provided with this printer with older printers.)
PS driver: Use the PostScript (PS) driver for compatibility with PS needs. Certain features
(manual duplexing, printing booklets, watermarks, and printing more than four pages per sheet)
are not available with this driver.
Note The product automatically switches between PS emulation and PCL printer languages depending
on the driver you have selected. PS emulation emulates Adobe® PostScript Level2. PostScript is a
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. For information about accessing your printer
driver see Changing settings from your computer.
Understanding print quality settings
Print quality settings affect how light or dark the print is on the page and the style in which the
graphics are printed. You can also use the print quality settings to optimize the print quality for a
specific media type. See Optimizing print quality for media types for more information.
EN Understanding print quality settings 43
You can change the settings in the printer properties to accommodate the types of jobs you are
printing. The following settings are available depending on the printer driver you are using:
●Best Quality (ProRes 1200): This prints at 1200 dpi (dots per inch) and provides the best
print quality.
●Faster Printing (FastRes 1200): The resolution is rendered differently so that the job can
print faster. This is the default setting.
●1200 dpi
●600 dpi
●300 dpi
●Custom: This prints the same as the Faster Printing setting, but you can change the scale
patterns.
●EconoMode (Save Toner): Text is printed using less toner. This setting is useful when you
are printing drafts.
Note Changing the resolution can change the formatting of your text.
To temporarily change print quality settings
To change the print quality settings only for the current software application’s use, access the
properties through the Print Setup menu in the application you are using to print. See Changing
settings from your computer for more information.
To change print quality settings for all future jobs
You can access print quality settings by selecting Printers from the Windows Start menu, then
accessing the properties for the product. The settings are on the Finishing tab (Windows) under
Print Quality settings in the printer properties. To view the details of each setting, click Details. For
Macintosh OS 9.1 select the Imaging Options screen.
To enable EconoMode (save toner)
An excellent way to extend the life of your print cartridge is by using EconoMode. EconoMode
uses substantially less toner than normal printing. The printed image is lighter, but it is adequate
for printing drafts or proofs.
To enable EconoMode, access the printer properties. On the Finishing tab (Windows) or the
Imaging Options screen (Macintosh OS 9.1) under Print Quality, select EconoMode. For
Macintosh OS X use the Device Configuration Utility:
1Open the HP LaserJet Director.
2Choose Tools.
3Choose Device Configuration.
4Choose the Print tab.
5On the Print Quality menu, choose to turn EconoMode On.
Note See Changing settings from your computer for instructions on enabling EconoMode for all future jobs.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
44 4 Printing EN
Optimizing print quality for media types
Media type settings control the temperature of your printer’s fuser. You can change the settings for
the media that you are using to optimize the print quality. The following are the media types that
you can optimize for:
●Plain paper
●Bond paper
●Card stock
●Envelope
●Heavy paper
●Labels
●Rough paper
●Thin paper
●Transparency
To access the optimizing feature
You can access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver. For more
information, see Changing settings from your computer.
Note Printing speeds are automatically reduced when printing special-sized media.
Note You need to reset the default after the job prints.
EN Printing envelopes 45
Printing envelopes
Use one of the following methods to print envelopes:
●To print one envelope
●To print multiple envelopes
To print one envelope
Only use envelopes that are recommended for laser printers. See
Product media specifications for more information.
Note
Use the priority input tray for printing one envelope. Use the main input
tray for printing multiple envelopes.
1To prevent the envelopes from curling as they print, open the
straight-through output door.
2Before loading the envelopes, slide the media guides outward to
slightly wider than the envelopes.
3Place the envelope with the stamp end forward and the side to be
printed facing up.
Note
If the envelope has a flap on the short edge, feed that edge into the
printer first.
4Adjust the media guides to the width of the envelope. Set Optimize
for: on the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver to Envelope,
and print the envelope.
1
2
3
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
46 4 Printing EN
To print multiple envelopes
Only use envelopes that are recommended for laser printers. See
Product media specifications for more information.
Note
Use the priority input tray for printing one envelope. Use the main input
tray for printing multiple envelopes.
1To prevent the envelopes from curling as they print, open the
straight-through output door.
2Before loading the envelopes, slide the media guides outward to
slightly wider than the envelopes.
3Place the envelopes with the stamp end forward and the side to be
printed facing up.
Note
If the envelopes have a flap on the short edge, feed that edge into the
printer first.
4Adjust the media guides to the length and width of the envelopes.
Set Optimize for: on the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver
to Envelope, and print the envelope.
5Replace the priority input tray.
1
2
3
4
EN Printing transparencies and labels 47
Printing transparencies and labels
Only use transparencies and labels that are recommended for use in laser printers, such as HP
transparency film and laser quality labels. See Product media specifications for more information.
CAUTION Inspect the media to make sure that it is not wrinkled or curled and that it does not have any torn
edges or missing labels. Do not run labels through the product more than once. The adhesive may
damage the product.
To print transparencies or labels
1Open the straight-through output door on the back of the product.
2Load a single page in the priority input tray or load multiple pages in the main input tray. Make
sure that the top of the media is forward and the side to be printed (rough side of
transparencies) is facing up.
3Adjust the media guides.
4Access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows printer driver. Then select
Optimize for: and choose Transparency or Labels in the drop-down list.
5Print the document. Remove the media from the back of the printer as it prints to prevent it
from sticking together, and place the printed pages on a flat surface.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
48 4 Printing EN
Printing letterhead or preprinted forms
Only use letterhead or preprinted forms that are recommended for use in laser printers, such as
HP laser quality letterhead and preprinted forms. See Product media specifications for more
information.
Use these instructions to print documents on letterhead or preprinted forms.
To print letterhead or preprinted forms
1Load the paper with the top forward and the side to be printed facing up. Adjust the media
guides to fit the width of the paper.
2Print the document.
Note To print a single-page cover letter on letterhead, followed by a multiple-page document, load the
standard paper in the main input tray first, then load the letterhead into the priority input tray. The
product automatically prints from the priority input tray first.
manuals4you.com
EN Printing custom-sized media or card stock 49
Printing custom-sized media or card stock
HP LaserJet 3300 series products can print on custom-sized media or card stock between 76 by
127 mm. (3 by 5 inches) and 216 by 356 mm. (8.5 by 14 inches). Depending on the media, you
can print up to 10 sheets from the priority input tray. Use the main input tray for more than 10
sheets.
Note Make sure that the sheets are not stuck together before you load them.
To print custom-sized media or card stock
1Open the straight-through output door.
2Load the media with the narrow side forward and the side to be printed facing up. Adjust the
side and rear media guides to fit the media.
3Select the correct size in the printer settings. (Software settings can override printer
properties.)
4If printing on card stock, access the optimizing feature from the Paper tab in your Windows
printer driver. Then select Optimize for: and choose Card stock from the drop-down list.
5Print the document.
Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing)
To print on both sides of the media (manual duplexing), you must run the media through the printer
twice. You can print using the normal output path or the straight-through output path.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you use the normal output path for lightweight paper and use
the straight-through output path for any heavy media or media that curls when printed.
See the following topics for more information:
To duplex manually on lightweight media
To duplex manually on heavy media or card stock (straight-through output path)
Note Manual duplexing is supported only in Windows.
Manual duplexing can cause the product to become dirty, reducing print quality. If the product
becomes dirty, see Cleaning and maintenance for instructions.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
50 4 Printing EN
To duplex manually on lightweight media
1Make sure that the straight-through output door is closed.
2Access the printer properties (for instructions, see Changing
settings from your computer). On the Finishing tab, click Print on
Both Sides, select the Flip Pages Up check box, and click OK.
Print the document.
3After side one has printed, remove the remaining paper from the
input tray, and set it aside until after you finish your manual
duplexing job.
4Gather the printed pages, keep the printed side down, and
straighten the stack.
5Remove the priority input tray and place the stack of media back in
the input tray. Side one should be facing down with the top edge
toward the printer. Replace the priority input tray.
6Click Continue (on screen) and wait for side two to print.
1
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
EN Printing on both sides of the media (manual duplexing) 51
To duplex manually on heavy media or card
stock (straight-through output path)
For heavy media, such as card stock, use the straight-through output
path.
1Load the media, and open the straight-through output door on the
back of the product.
2Access the printer properties. See Changing settings from your
computer for instructions. On the Finishing tab, click Print on Both
Sides, select the Straight Paper Path check box, and click OK.
Print the document.
3After side one has printed, remove the remaining paper from the
input tray and set it aside until after you finish your manual
duplexing job.
4Gather the printed pages, turn the printed side down, and
straighten the stack before placing it back in the input tray. Side one
should be facing down with the top edge toward the printer.
5Click Continue (on screen), and wait for side two to print.
1
2
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
52 4 Printing EN
Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of media
You can select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet of media. If you
choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the
sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. You can specify up to nine pages per
sheet of media for Macintosh, or up to 16 for Windows.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Windows)
1From your software application, access the printer properties. See Changing settings from
your computer for instructions.
2On the Finishing tab under Pages Per Sheet, specify the number of pages per sheet that you
want to print. You can print up to 16 pages per sheet with a Windows OS.
3There is also a check box for page borders and a drop-down menu to specify the order of
pages printed on the sheet.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet (Macintosh)
1From the General drop-down list, select Layout.
2In the Pages Per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages per sheet to print. You can
print up to nine pages per sheet with a Macintosh OS.
EN Printing booklets 53
Printing booklets
You can print booklets on letter, legal, executive, or A4 paper. This function is available for
Windows users only.
To print booklets
1Load the paper, and make sure that the straight-through output
door is closed.
2Access the printer properties. See Changing settings from your
computer for instructions. On the Finishing tab, select Print on
Both Sides, and select Letter (Left Binding) or Letter (Right
Binding) in the Booklet drop-down menu. Print the booklet.
3After side one has been printed, remove the remaining paper from
the input tray, and set it aside until your booklet job is complete.
4Gather the printed pages, keep the printed side down, and
straighten the stack of paper.
5Place the printed pages back in the input tray. Side one should be
facing down with the top edge toward the printer.
6Click Continue (on screen), and wait for side two to print.
7Fold and staple the pages.
9
8
1
7
5
3
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
54 4 Printing EN
Printing watermarks
You can use the watermark option to print text “underneath” (in the background) of an existing
document. For example, you might want to have large gray letters reading Draft or Confidential
printed diagonally across the first page or all of the pages of a document.
To access the watermark feature
1From your software application, access the printer properties. See Changing settings from
your computer for instructions.
2On the Effects tab (Windows) or the Watermark/Overlay screen (Macintosh), specify the
type of watermark that you want to print on your document.
EN 55
5Copying
Use these instructions to perform copying tasks with your HP LaserJet 3300 product:
●Starting a copy job
●Canceling a copy job
●Adjusting copy quality for the current job
●Adjusting the default copy quality
●Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job
●Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting
●Reducing or enlarging copies for the current job
●Adjusting the default copy size
●Changing the copy collation setting
●Changing the number of copies
●Using HP LaserJet Copier software
●Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software
●Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
56 5 Copying EN
Starting a copy job
To make copies with your HP LaserJet 3300 series product, use the following instructions:
1Load your original document onto the flatbed scanner face down (one page at a time) with the
top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
OR
Load your original document face up into the ADF input tray.
2Press start/copy on the product’s control panel to start copying.
3Repeat the process for each copy.
For more detailed instructions on loading originals onto the flatbed scanner or into the ADF input
tray, see Loading originals to copy or scan.
Note If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed scanner.
Canceling a copy job
To cancel a copy job, use one of the following methods:
●Press cancel on the control panel. If more than one process is running, it clears the process
that currently appears on the display panel.
●For copies started with the HP LaserJet Copier, click Cancel in the onscreen dialog box.
Note If you cancel a copy job, clear the original document from the flatbed scanner or from the ADF.
Adjusting copy quality for the current job
The default setting for copy quality is Text. This setting is the best for items that contain mostly
text.
When making a copy of a photo or graphic, you can select the Photo setting to increase the
quality of your copy, or select the Best Photo setting for the highest photo quality.
If you want to conserve toner, and the copy quality is not that important, select Draft. To change
the default copy quality, see Adjusting the default copy quality.
To adjust the copy quality for the current job
1From the control panel, press quality to display the current quality setting for the copy.
2Use the < and > buttons to scroll through the quality setting options.
3Select a resolution setting and press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start
the copy job, or menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Note The change in the copy quality setting will remain active for two minutes after the copy job has been
completed.
EN Adjusting the default copy quality 57
Adjusting the default copy quality
The default setting for copy quality is Text. This setting is the best for items that contain mostly
text. When making a copy of a photo or graphic, you can select Photo or Best Photo to
increase the quality. If you want to conserve toner and the copy quality is not that important, select
Draft. To change the copy quality for the current copy job only, see Adjusting copy quality for the
current job.
To adjust the copy quality
1From the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Default Quality.
4Use the < or > button to scroll through the choices.
5Press menu/enter to save the selection.
Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job
The lighter/darker setting affects the lightness or darkness (contrast) of the copy. Use the following
procedure to change the contrast for the current copy job only. After the copy has been made, the
contrast setting returns to the default.
Note To change the default copy contrast, see Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting.
To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the current job
1Press lighter/darker to display the current contrast setting.
2Use the < or > button to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make the copy lighter
than the original, or move the slider to the right to make the copy darker than the original.
3Press press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or
menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Adjusting the default lighter/darker (contrast) setting
The default lighter/darker setting affects all copy jobs. To adjust the lighter/darker setting for the
current copy job only, see Adjusting the lighter/darker (contrast) setting for the current job.
To adjust the default lighter/darker setting
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Copy Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Def. Light/Dark and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to adjust the setting. Move the slider to the left to make all copies lighter
than the original, or move the slider to the right to make all copies darker than the original.
5Press menu/enter to save the selection.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
58 5 Copying EN
Reducing or enlarging copies for the current job
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product can reduce copies to as small as 25% of the original or
enlarge copies to as much as 400% of the original. It can also make the following reductions or
enlargements automatically:
●Original: (100%)
●Legal to Letter: (78%)
●Legal to A4: (83%)
●A4 to Letter: Full page (94%)
●Letter to A4: Fit to page when copying (97%)
●Full Page: (91%)
●Fit To Page
●2 pages per sheet
●4 pages per sheet
●Custom: (25-400%)
Note When using the Fit To Page setting, copy from the flatbed scanner only.
Note When using the 2 pages per sheet or 4 pages per sheet setting, copy from the ADF only. These
options will not display unless the ADF is installed.
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job
To reduce or enlarge copies for the current job only, use the following instructions:
1From the control panel, press reduce/enlarge.
2Enter the size to which you would like to reduce or enlarge the copies in this job. You can
choose Original=100%, Ltr To A4, A4 To Ltr, Lgl To Ltr, Lgl To A4, Full
Page, Fit to Page, or Custom: 25-400%.
3If you choose Custom 25-400%, enter a percentage using the numeric keypad.
4Press press start/copy to save the selection and immediately start the copy job, or
menu/enter to save the selection without starting the job.
Note You must change the default paper size in the paper input tray to match the output size or part of
your copy may be cut off. For instructions, see Changing the default paper size.
Adjusting the default copy size
The default copy size is the size to which copies are normally reduced or enlarged. If you keep the
factory default size set to Original (100%), all copies will be the same size as the original
document.
Note If you only want to adjust the copy size for the job you are currently copying, see Reducing or enlarging
copies for the current job.
EN Changing the copy collation setting 59
To change the default copy size
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Copy Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Def. Redu/Enlrg and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select the option for how you normally want to reduce or enlarge
copies. You can choose Original=100%, Ltr To A4, A4 To Ltr, Lgl To Ltr, Lgl To
A4, Full Page, Fit to Page, or Custom: 25-400%. If you choose Custom, type in the
percentage of the original size that you normally want for copies.
5Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the copy collation setting
You can set the product to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are
making two copies of three pages and automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order:
1,2,3,1,2,3. If automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.
To use automatic collation, the original document must fit into memory. If it does not, the product
makes only one copy and displays a message notifying you of the change. If that happens, use
one of the following methods to finish the job:
●Split the job into smaller jobs containing fewer pages.
●Make only one copy of the document at a time.
●Turn off automatic collation.
●If using the Best Photo quality setting, try using the Photo setting instead.
The collation setting you choose is in effect for all copies until you change the setting.
The collation setting can also be changed from the product software. For instructions on accessing
settings from the product software, see Changing settings from your computer.
To change the copy collation setting for the current job
To change the copy collation setting for the current job, press collation on the control panel.
If the copy collation setting is On, press collation to turn it Off for the current job. If the copy
collation setting is Off, press collation to turn it On for the current job.
To change the default copy collation setting
To change the copy collation default, use the following instructions:
1From the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Def. Collation.
4Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off.
5Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for automatic copy collation is On.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
60 5 Copying EN
Changing the number of copies
You can choose to have the default number of copies be any value from 1 to 99.
To change the number of copies for the current job
1From the product’s control panel, press # of copies and use the < and > buttons to inicrement
or decrement the quantity that appears in the control panel display;
OR
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you want to
make for your current job.
2Press start/copy to begin copying your job.
To change the default number of copies
1From the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Copy Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Def. # of Copies and press menu/enter.
4Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies (between 1 and 99) that you want as
the default.
5Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for number of copies is 1.
Using HP LaserJet Copier software
You can use HP LaserJet Copier to perform any of the following tasks when you copy your original:
●Print up to 99 copies of the same document
●Enable or disable collation
●Reduce or enlarge the image
●Adjust the contrast
●Specify the copy quality
●Make color copies by sending to a color printer using HP LaserJet Copy Plus
Note This functionality is not available in Windows 95.
To access HP LaserJet Copier (Windows or Macintosh)
To access HP LaserJet Copier, use one of the following methods:
●From HP LaserJet Director, click Copy or Copy Plus.
●From the Windows task bar, click Start, Programs, HP LaserJet 3300, and HP LaserJet
Copier.
●From HP LaserJet Document Manager (Windows), click the Copier icon.
OR
From HP Workplace (Macintosh), click the Copy or Copy Plus icon.
EN Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software 61
Note If you click the Copy Plus icon in addition to the standard copier settings, you can also adjust the
brightness of your copies and send the copy to another printer, including a color printer. For more
information, see Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software.
Note For more information on using these features, see the product software Help.
Using HP LaserJet Copy Plus software
You can use HP LaserJet Copy Plus to send a scanned image to any installed Windows printer,
including color printers, enabling you to make color copies. You can also access other advanced
features, such as multiple pages per sheet copying and watermarks.
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Windows)
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus, use one of the following methods:
●From HP LaserJet Director, click Copy Plus.
OR
Click Copy and select, I want to copy to another printer.
●From the Windows task bar, click Start, Programs, HP LaserJet 3300, and HP LaserJet
Copier. Select I want to copy to another printer.
Note This functionality is not available in Windows 95.
To access HP LaserJet Copy Plus (Macintosh)
1From the HP LaserJet Director, click Customize.
2Click the Customization tab.
3Enable Copy Plus by checking the Copy Plus check box.
4Click OK.
The HP LaserJet Director will now display a Copy Plus option. This can be used in the same
manner as the HP LaserJet Copier, see To access HP LaserJet Copier (Windows or Macintosh).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
62 5 Copying EN
Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books
To copy or scan a photo
1Place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture side down and the top left corner of the
photo in the lower right corner of the glass.
2Gently close the lid.
3You are now ready to scan or copy the photo using one of the methods described. See
Understanding scanning methods for more information.
To copy a multiple page stack of 2-sided
originals
1Load the stack of originals to be copied into the ADF with the first
page up.
2Press start/copy. The odd-numbered pages will be copied and
printed.
3Remove the stack from the ADF output tray and load the stack with
the last page up and facing forward.
4Press start/copy. The even-numbered pages will be printed.
5Collate the odd and even-numbered printed copies.
1
3
5
EN Copying photos, two-sided originals, or books 63
To copy a book
1Lift the lid and place the book on the flatbed scanner with the
desired book page located in the lower right corner of the glass.
2Gently close the lid.
3Gently press down on the lid to press the book to the flatbed
scanner surface.
4Press start/copy, or use one of the other described methods to
copy or scan the book.
5If your product does not have an ADF, the rear hinge may lift up to
accommodate the book. Gently press down on the center of the lid
to press the book to the flatbed scanner. If the lid comes out, align
the hinge posts to the recesses and reinstall.
1
2
3
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
64 5 Copying EN
EN 65
6Scanning
Use the following instructions to perform scanning tasks with your HP LaserJet 3300 series
product:
●Understanding scanning methods
●Scanning from the product’s control panel
●Canceling a scan job
●Scanning with the product software
●Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software
●Archiving scanned text or images
●Scanning with OCR
●Enhancing images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center
●Adding annotations to HP documents
●Adding annotations to scanned image files
●Sending scanned items as e-mail attachments
●Scanner resolution and color
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
66 6 Scanning EN
Understanding scanning methods
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product offers four ways to scan an item:
●Scan from the product: Start scanning directly from the product using the control panel’s
scan buttons. The start scan and scan to buttons can be programmed to scan to a
destination. For more information, see Scanning from the product’s control panel.
●Scan from the HP LaserJet Director: Use the HP LaserJet Director for one-touch scanning
to specific programmed destinations, such as saving to a file, sending it to e-mail, or
converting it to document files.
●Scan from the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer: Use the HP LaserJet Scan Control
Viewer to customize your scan and send it to a selected destination. For more information, see
Scanning with the product software. The three ways to access the HP LaserJet Scan Control
Viewer are:
•Click Scan from the Document Manager.
•Click Scan from the HP LaserJet Director.
•Select Scanner from the program group in the Start menu.
●Scan from TWAIN-compliant software: If you are using Microsoft Windows 95 and want to
scan documents, you must use a TWAIN-compliant application. For all other operating
systems, using TWAIN-compliant software is optional. For more information, see Scanning
with TWAIN-compliant software.
Note To learn about optical character recognition (OCR) software, see Scanning with OCR.
Note Scan buttons are not available on the 3310 model.
Scanning from the product’s control panel
Note If you purchased the HP LaserJet 3310 product, scanning from the control panel is not available. To
scan with the 3310, see Scanning with the product software.
Use the following instructions to scan directly from your HP LaserJet 3300 series product:
●To scan from the product’s control panel using the start scan button
●To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection
●To use the scan to button via network connection
●To reprogram the scan to button destinations
●To reprogram the start scan button
Note For the best scan quality, load your originals onto the flatbed scanner.
To scan from the product’s control panel using the start scan
button
To scan from the product’s control panel, use the following instructions. For more detailed
information on loading original documents onto the flatbed scanner or into the ADF input tray, see
Loading originals to copy or scan.
EN Scanning from the product’s control panel 67
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2To start scanning, press start scan on the product’s control panel.
Note To scan to a particular destination, you can program the start scan button or use the scan to button
on the product’s control panel. For more information, see To reprogram the start scan button and
To reprogram the scan to button destinations.
To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection
To scan to a destination using the scan to button on the product’s control panel, use the following
instructions:
1Press scan to on the control panel.
2Use the < and > buttons to select a destination.
3Press start scan or menu/enter.
To use the scan to button via network connection
To use scan to through a network connection, the Display Name must be configured. The Display
Name is configured as follows:
1From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2Select the Monitor Device tab.
3Enter the text that you wish to use to identify your PC in the Display Name edit box (9
characters maximum).
4Click Apply to make the changes and keep the Customize dialog box open, or OK to keep the
changes and return to the HP LaserJet Series Director. New destinations that include this
Display Name will now appear in the device scan to destinations list.
5Follow the instructions in To use the scan to button via USB or parallel connection to scan to
this destination.
To reprogram the scan to button destinations
1From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2Select the Monitor Device tab.
3From the Device Scan To Button Settings group box, select the desired destinations, one at a
time, and click the Add button to add to the scan to list.
4To edit the device display string or update the e-mail address for a recipient, select the
destination in the scan to list and click the Edit button.
5To remove a destination from the scan to list, select the destination and click the Remove
button.
6Click Apply to make the changes and keep the Customize dialog box open, or OK to keep the
changes and return to the HP LaserJet Director.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
68 6 Scanning EN
To reprogram the start scan button
To program the start scan button to use a scan to destination, use the following instructions:
1From the HP LaserJet Director, click the Customize button to open the Customize property
sheet.
2Select the Monitor Device tab.
3Choose an action from the drop-down list. The default setting is Open the HP LaserJet
Director.
Canceling a scan job
To cancel a scan job, use one of the following methods:
●Press cancel on the control panel.
●Click the cancel button in the onscreen dialog box.
Note If you cancel a scan job, clear the original document from the flatbed scanner or from the ADF.
Note These functions vary with Macintosh computers.
Scanning with the product software
You can perform most scanning functions from HP LaserJet Director.
HP LaserJet Director is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95. If you are using Windows 95, see
Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software.
For more detailed instructions on loading original documents onto the flatbed scanner or into the
ADF input tray, see Loading originals to copy or scan.
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Windows)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button on
HP LaserJet Director.
4Specify a scan destination.
5If you want to scan in color, select the Color radio button.
•If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed
scanner.
6Choose the option to scan all pages at once.
EN Scanning with the product software 69
•If you choose to scan page-by-page, see To use page-by-page scanning (Windows).
7Click Scan.
8If there are originals loaded in the ADF, all of the pages are scanned automatically. If the ADF
is empty, one page is scanned from the glass. The entire document is then sent to the
specified destination.
•If you send a scanned document to a file, a printer, or an e-mail application, a secondary
dialog box opens and prompts you for additional information.
To scan using HP LaserJet Director (Macintosh)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
3To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button in
HP LaserJet Director.
4Specify an image type.
5Choose the option to Scan All.
•If you choose to scan page-by-page, see To use page-by-page scanning (Macintosh).
6After all the pages have completed the scanning process, choose Send To Destination, then
choose Send Now!
OR
Use the Save As icon to save the pages to a disk file.
To use page-by-page scanning (Windows)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3From the HP LaserJet Director, click Scan to launch the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer.
4From the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer, select the option to scan one page at a time and
then click Scan. The first page is scanned and appears in the Preview window.
•If you send a scanned document to a file, a printer, or an e-mail application, a secondary
dialog box appears and prompts you for additional information.
5Specify a destination to send the scan to, and change the settings accordingly.
6Use the Viewer modes as necessary by clicking the corresponding button on the toolbar
located in the upper right corner of the Preview window.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
70 6 Scanning EN
•Selection mode allows you to specify the area in which to save.
•Edit Region mode allows you to edit the region areas and types.
7Click Accept to save the current image.
8If you wish to scan another page, click Yes in the message box that displays. Repeat steps 4
through 7 to scan more pages. Click No in the message box to send the current scan to its
destination.
To use page-by-page scanning (Macintosh)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
3To open the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer dialog box, click the Scan button on
HP LaserJet Director.
4Specify an image type.
5Choose To Scan.
6After the scan process has finished, choose Scan another page.
7Repeat step 6 for each page of the document.
8After all the pages have completed the scanning process, choose Send To Destination, then
choose Send Now!
OR
Use the Save As icon to save the pages to a disk file.
Scanning with TWAIN-compliant software
Note If you are using Windows 95 and want to scan documents, you will have to use a TWAIN-compliant
application. For all other operating systems, you may use a TWAIN-compliant application or the
product software.
The HP LaserJet 3300 series product is TWAIN-compliant and works with Windows- and
Macintosh-based programs that support TWAIN-compliant scanning devices. While in a
TWAIN-enabled program, you can access the scanning feature and scan an image directly into the
open application. To do so, follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an image using TWAIN.
For more specific information, see the product software Help.
Note The Macintosh product software is TWAIN version 1.9 compliant.
To use flatbed scanner preview scan
Use this procedure to preview the scanned image when you are using the TWAIN interface in
Windows.
EN Archiving scanned text or images 71
1In the scan (or TWAIN) software, click the preview button. The scanner will scan the image
and then display it in the preview screen.
2If you want to save only part of the image, select the area that you want to save. The selected
area will be saved to the preset scan destination.
Archiving scanned text or images
HP software provides direct access to your file management system, which means you can quickly
store scanned images in any directory you choose. You can use HP LaserJet Director or
HP LaserJet Document Manager to store scanned images.
To archive a scanned image
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3In the HP LaserJet Director, click Archive. If the HP LaserJet Director does not display an
Archive option, use the Customize option in the HP LaserJet Director to activate the Archive
feature.
4The document is scanned and stored in the destination specified by the user in the Save As
dialog.
To use the archive feature (Macintosh)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2If the product is connected directly to your computer, the HP LaserJet Director opens after you
insert an item into the ADF input tray.
OR
If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or HP LaserJet Director does not
automatically open, double-click the desktop alias for the HP LaserJet Director.
3In the HP LaserJet Director, click Archive. If the HP LaserJet Director does not display an
Archive option, use the Customize option in the HP LaserJet Director to activate the Archive
feature.
4The paper document is scanned, and the created document is opened in the HP Workplace.
5If necessary, you can crop the image or add annotations.
6Select File. Then select Save to save the document to disk.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
72 6 Scanning EN
Scanning with OCR
To edit scanned text (Windows and Macintosh)
You can use the OCR software to import scanned text into your preferred word processing
application for editing. This allows you to edit faxes, letters, newspaper clippings, and many other
documents. The HP LaserJet Director allows you to specify the word processing application you
want to use for editing.
Note OCR cannot recognize handwritten text.
To change the OCR word processing application
You can change the default word processing program that is used for OCR.
1Open the HP LaserJet Director.
2Click the Customize button.
3Select the Button Customization tab.
4Select OCR, then click the Options button.
5Select the desired word processing application from the Select Application drop-down list.
6Click Next and select the application’s icon if it is not already selected.
7Click Finish.
8Click Apply or OK to save your selection.
Note Due to the complexity of some word processing applications and their interaction with the product,
it is sometimes preferable to scan to Wordpad (a Windows accessory) and then cut and paste the
text into your preferred word processing application.
To use HP LaserJet Director’s OCR feature
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray, with the top of the document
forward, and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid. See Loading originals to copy or scan for more information.
2Press start scan on the product’s control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet
Director launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or
the HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows
task bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
3In HP LaserJet Director, click OCR.
4The original is scanned, and your word processing software application launches
automatically.
5The scanned text has been optically recognized and is now ready to edit using your word
processing application.
EN Scanning with OCR 73
Note If the word processing icon is not present or active, either you do not have a word processing software
application installed on your computer or the scanner software did not recognize the application
during the installation. For instructions on how to create a link to your word processing application,
see To change the OCR word processing application.
Note The OCR software does not support scanning colored text. Colored text will always be converted to
black and white text before being sent to OCR; thus, all text in the final document will be black and
white regardless of the original color.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
74 6 Scanning EN
Enhancing images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo
Center
You can use HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center to make the following
enhancements to scanned images:
●Contrast
●Brightness
●Color adjustment
●Crop
●Effects
●Invert
●Red-eye removal
●Rotate and flip
●Sharpen
●Straighten
Note If you are using the Macintosh product software, these features are found in the HP Workplace.
However, not all of the features listed above are supported by the Macintosh software.
To access image enhancement features (Windows)
●From HP LaserJet Document Manager, open a document and select an image enhancement
feature from the Image menu.
●For the Photo Center, first open a document then turn on Advanced menus from the View
menu in order to display the Image menu.
Note For instructions on using HP LaserJet Document Manager’s image enhancement features, see the
product software Help.
Adding annotations to HP documents
You can use HP software to modify and annotate scanned documents that are saved as
HP documents (.hpd extension). You can add any of the following elements to an HP document:
●Text
●Electronic sticky notes
●Highlights (to text or graphics)
●Rubber stamp (for example, Confidential)
●Lines and arrows
●Hyperlinks
To use annotations with other types of scanned documents, see Adding annotations to scanned
image files.
Note For complete instructions on using HP LaserJet Document Manager’s annotation features, see the
product software Help.
EN Adding annotations to scanned image files 75
To access HP LaserJet Document Manager’s annotation features
Note These instructions apply to Windows users only.
1If it is not open, open the document to be annotated in the HP LaserJet Document Manager.
2Select an annotation tool from the Annotation menu.
To change the annotation settings
To change the annotations settings, open the Annotations menu and select Annotation
Properties.
Adding annotations to scanned image files
You can add annotations to .bmp, .tif, .jpg, and .gif files using the HP LaserJet Photo Center.
You can add the following annotation elements:
●Freehand drawing items
●Lines, rectangles, ovals, and polygons (filled or outlined)
●Text
To add annotations to an image file, select the Tools menu in the HP LaserJet Photo Center.
Sending scanned items as e-mail attachments
You can use either HP LaserJet Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager to scan to e-mail. Not
all e-mail applications are supported.
Note Scan to e-mail features are not supported in Windows 95.
To scan to e-mail (Windows)
Note If there are originals loaded in the ADF input tray and on the flatbed scanner, the product
automatically scans from the ADF regardless of whether there is an original on the flatbed scanner.
1Open the HP LaserJet Director.
2Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
3Press start scan on the control panel. If you are using the ADF, the HP LaserJet Director
launches automatically. If you are on a network, scanning from the flatbed scanner, or the
HP LaserJet Director does not automatically open, click the Start button on the Windows task
bar, point to Programs, and click HP LaserJet Director or click on it in the System Tray.
4In HP LaserJet Director, click E-mail.
5The original is scanned, and your computer e-mail software application launches and
automatically attaches the scanned image file to a new message. Enter an e-mail address and
click Send.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
76 6 Scanning EN
To scan to e-mail (Macintosh)
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2Open the HP LaserJet Director by double-clicking the HP LaserJet Director alias that appears
on the desktop.
3Click the E-mail button.
4When an e-mail appears with the scanned item attached, enter an e-mail address and click
Send.
To e-mail scanned files in an alternative mode
You can use an alternative mode to send a document in e-mail in any of the following situations:
●You do not have a compatible e-mail program.
●The E-mail button does not appear on the HP LaserJet Director.
●You do not have access to the HP LaserJet Director.
1Load the originals to be scanned face up in the ADF input tray and adjust the media guides.
OR
Lift the flatbed cover and load the original to be scanned face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass. Gently
close the lid.
2Use the HP LaserJet Director or other software to scan the document to the desktop or HP
LaserJet Scan Control Viewer.
3Save the file in the format you want.
4Open your e-mail program, attach the file as you normally would, enter an address, and click
Send.
Scanner resolution and color
If you are printing a scanned image or copying an image and the quality is not as you expected,
you might have selected a resolution or color setting in the copier/scanner software that does not
match your needs. Resolution and color affect scanned and copied images in the following ways:
●Image clarity
●Texture of gradations (smooth or rough)
●Scan and copy time
●File size
Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi) while color, grayscale, and black and white define the
number of colors possible. You can adjust the scanner hardware resolution up to 600 dpi. The
software has the ability to perform an interpolated resolution up to 9600 dpi. You can set color and
grayscale at 1 bit (black and white) or 8 bit (256 levels of gray) to 24 bit (true color).
The resolution and color guidelines table lists simple tips that you can follow to meet your scanning
and copying needs.
EN Scanner resolution and color 77
Note Setting the resolution and color to a high value can create large files that take up disk space and
slow the scanning or copying process. It is important that you first determine how you are going to
use the scanned image.
Note Color and grayscale images achieve the best resolution when scanned from the flatbed scanner
rather than the ADF.
Resolution and color guidelines
Intended use Recommended resolution Recommended color settings
Fax 150 dpi ●Black and White
E-mail 150 dpi ●Black and White if the image does not
require smooth gradation
●Grayscale if the image requires smooth
gradation
●Color if the image is in color
Edit text 300 dpi ●Black and White
Print (graphics or text) 600 dpi for text and complex graphics
150 to 300 dpi for simple graphics
and photos
●Black and White for text and line art
●Grayscale for shaded or colored
graphics and photos
●Color if the image is in color
Display on screen 75 dpi ●Black and White for text
●Grayscale for graphics and photos
●Color if the image is in color
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
78 6 Scanning EN
Color
You can set the color values to the following settings when copying or scanning.
Setting Recommended use Where to set the color value
Color High quality color photos or documents in
which the color is important. Windows scanner software
Black and White Use for text documents. Windows scanner software
Grayscale Use this setting when file size is an issue or
when you want a document or photograph
scanned quickly.
Windows scanner software
Photo Only Documents that contain mostly color and
black and white photos. Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Text Only Documents that contain mostly text. Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Mixed Color Documents that contain mostly color
graphics. Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Mixed Grayscale Documents that contain mostly black and
white graphics. Windows or Macintosh TWAIN driver
Photo Typical photo quality. Copier software
Text Documents that contain mostly text. Copier software
Best Photo Documents that contain mostly color and
black and white photos.
Best photo quality.
Copier software
Draft To save toner when copying documents. Copier software
EN 79
7Faxing
Use the instructions below to perform basic faxing tasks with your HP LaserJet 3300mfp product:
●Setting the information in the fax header
●Setting the answer mode
●Loading originals to fax
●Sending faxes
●Canceling a fax job
●Using manual dial
●Deleting faxes from memory
●Redialing manually
●Sending a fax at a future time
●Receiving faxes
●Receiving faxes to your computer
●About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
●Managing group-dial codes
●Deleting all phone book entries
●Using dialing characters
●Inserting a dial prefix
●Using fax forwarding
●Using fax polling
●Enabling an extension phone
●Sending a fax by dialing from a telephone
●Changing the HP LaserJet 3330 product’s volume settings
●Changing the default resolution
●Changing the default contrast
●Changing the detect dial tone setting
●Changing how the product answers incoming faxes
●Changing rings-to-answer
●Changing answer ring patterns
●Changing the silence-detect mode
●Changing autoreduction settings for incoming faxes
●Enabling stamp received faxes
●Setting the fax error correction
●Selecting tone- or pulse-dialing mode
●Changing redial settings
●Using billing codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
80 7 Faxing EN
●Changing the V.34 setting
●Managing fax logs and reports
●Printing the fax activity log
●Setting the fax activity log to print automatically
●Printing a fax call report
●Setting fax call report print times
●Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report
●Printing a phone book report
●Printing the billing codes report
●Printing a T.30 protocol trace report
●Printing the block fax list
●Printing all fax reports
Setting the information in the fax header
To set the fax header
To set or change the fax header information, use the following steps. If you need help entering any
information, see Using dialing characters.
1On the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Using the < and > buttons, select Time/Date, Header and press menu/enter.
3Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Header, and press menu/enter.
4Using the alphanumeric keypad, enter your fax number and press menu/enter.
5Using the alphanumeric keypad, add the name of your company and press menu/enter.
Setting the answer mode
Depending on your situation, you can set the HP LaserJet 3330’s answer mode to automatic or
manual.
●Automatic: In automatic answer mode, the product answers incoming calls after a specified
number of rings or upon recognition of special fax tones. To specify the number of rings, see
Changing rings-to-answer.
●Manual: In manual answer mode, the product never answers calls. You must start the
fax-receiving process yourself, either by pressing start fax on the control panel or by picking
up a phone connected to that line and dialing 1-2-3.
The default answer mode is automatic.
Note Although most users leave the answer mode set to automatic, voice callers who dial the fax phone
number will hear fax tones if the phone is not answered, or if they do not hang up by the specified
number of rings-to-answer. If you do not want voice callers to hear fax tones, use the manual setting,
but remember that fax calls are not received automatically.
To set the answer mode
To set or change the answer mode, use the following steps:
1On the control panel, press menu/enter.
EN Loading originals to fax 81
2Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Using the < and > buttons, select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Answer Mode.
5Using the < and > buttons, select Automatic or Manual and press menu/enter.
6The control panel display shows the answer mode setting that you specified.
Loading originals to fax
Use the instructions below to load original documents for faxing.
To load fax documents into the ADF input tray
1Before loading the fax documents into the ADF input tray, check to make sure there is nothing
on the flatbed scanner.
2Put the top ends of the document to be faxed print side up in the ADF input tray with the first
page to be scanned at the top of the stack.
3Push the document up against the side of the ADF input tray.
4Slide the document into the ADF input tray until it does not move any farther.
The document is now ready to be faxed.
Sending faxes
To send a fax to one recipient
Note If you want to improve the quality of a paper document before faxing it, scan the document, straighten
or clean the image, and send it as a fax from the software. For more information, see the product
software Help.
1Dial the fax number using one of the following methods:
•Use the alphanumeric buttons on the product’s control panel.
•If the fax number you are calling has been assigned to a one-touch key, press that key.
•If the fax number you are calling has a speed-dial code, press speed dial, enter the
speed-dial code using the alphanumeric buttons, and press menu/enter.
Note When dialing with the alphanumeric buttons, include any pauses or other needed numbers, such as
an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a long-distance
prefix. For more information, see Using dialing characters.
2Load the document into the ADF input tray.
3Press fax/send.
When the last page of the fax has exited the product, you can start sending another fax, copying,
or scanning.
To fax to numbers you use regularly, you can assign a one-touch key or speed-dial code. See To
program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys and To program group-dial codes. If you have
electronic phone books available, you may be able to use them for selecting recipients. Electronic
phone books are generated with third-party applications.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
82 7 Faxing EN
To send a fax to multiple recipients
You can send a fax to several fax numbers at once. If you want to send a fax to a group of fax
numbers that you have assigned to a group-dial code, see Managing group-dial codes. If you want
to send a fax to a group of numbers (maximum of 20) without a group-dial code, see To send a fax
to an ad hoc group.
In the rare instance that your document does not fit into memory, you will need to send the
document to each fax number one at a time or use HP LaserJet Director.
Note HP LaserJet Director is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95.
To send a fax using a group-dial code
1Load the document into the ADF input tray.
2Adjust any fax settings, such as contrast or resolution.
3Press the one-touch key for the group.
OR
Press phone book, press the group-dial code assigned to the group, and press menu/enter.
4Press fax/send.
The product scans the document into memory and sends the fax to each number specified. If a
number in the group is busy or does not answer, the product will redial the number based on its
redial setting. After multiple redial attempts fail, the product updates the Fax Activity Log with the
error and proceeds to the next number in the group.
Note The Fax Activity Log feature is not supported in the software for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can
print the Fax Activity Log using the control panel. For instructions, see Printing the fax activity log.
To send a fax to an ad hoc group
Use the following instructions to send a fax to a group of recipients that does not have an assigned
group-dial code:
1Load the document into the ADF input tray or the flatbed scanner.
2Dial the first fax number using one of the following methods:
•Use the alphanumeric buttons.
•If the fax number you are calling has a one-touch key, press that key.
•If the fax number you are calling has a speed-dial code, press phone book, enter the
speed-dial code using the alphanumeric buttons, and press menu/enter.
Note When dialing using the alphanumeric buttons, include any pauses or other needed numbers, such
as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9), or a long distance
prefix. See Using dialing characters for more information.
3Press menu/enter.
4To continue entering numbers, repeat steps 2 and 3.
OR
If you are finished entering numbers, go to the next step.
5Press fax/send.
EN Canceling a fax job 83
6The product sends the fax to each fax number. If a number in the group is busy or does not
answer, the product will redial that number based on its redial setting. If multiple redial
attempts fail, the product updates the Fax Activity Log with the error and then proceeds to the
next number in the group.
Note The Fax Activity Log feature is not supported in the software for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can
print the Fax Activity Log using the control panel. For instructions, see Printing the fax activity log.
Canceling a fax job
Use these instructions to cancel a single fax currently dialing or a fax that is being transmitted or
received.
To cancel the current fax job
Press cancel on the control panel. Any pages that have not been transmitted are canceled.
To cancel a fax job using fax job status
Use this procedure to cancel a fax job in the following situations:
●The product is waiting to redial after a busy signal or no answer.
●The fax is going to a group of numbers.
●The fax is scheduled to be sent at a future time.
Use the following steps to cancel a fax job using fax job status:
1Press menu/enter.
2Press menu/enter to select Fax Job Status.
3Use the < or > button to scroll through pending jobs until you reach the job you want to clear.
4Press menu/enter to select the job you want to cancel.
5Press menu/enter to confirm that you want the job to be canceled.
Using manual dial
Normally, the product dials after you press fax/send. At times, however, you might want the
product to dial each number as you press it. For example, if you are charging your fax call to a
calling card, you may need to dial the fax number, wait for the acceptance tone of your telephone
company, and then dial the calling card number. When dialing internationally, you might need to
dial part of the number and then listen for dial tones before continuing to dial.
To use manual dial
1Load the document into the ADF input tray.
2Press fax/send.
3Begin dialing. The fax number dials as you press each digit. This allows you to wait for pauses,
dial tones, international access tones, or calling card acceptance tones before continuing to
dial.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
84 7 Faxing EN
Deleting faxes from memory
Use this procedure only if you are concerned someone else has access to your product and will
try to reprint faxes from memory.
CAUTION In addition to clearing the reprint memory, this procedure clears any fax currently being sent, unsent
faxes pending redial, faxes scheduled to be sent at a future time, and faxes not printed or forwarded.
To delete faxes from memory
1Press menu/enter.
2Press > once to display Fax Functions and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Clear Saved Faxs and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
Redialing manually
If you want to send another document to the last fax number dialed, use the following procedure to
manually redial. If you are trying to resend the same document you sent the first time, you will
want to wait until the automatic redials have stopped or you have stopped them yourself.
Otherwise, the recipient might get the fax twice: once from the manual redial attempt and once
from one of the automatic redial attempts.
Note To stop the current redial attempt for a fax, or to cancel all pending, automatic redial attempts for a
fax, see Canceling a fax job. To change redial settings, see Changing redial settings.
To redial manually
1Load the document into the ADF input tray.
2Press redial/pause.
3Press fax/send. The product redials the last number dialed and attempts to send the fax.
Sending a fax at a future time
You can schedule a fax to be sent automatically at a future time to one or more people. When you
complete this procedure, the product scans the document into memory and returns to the Ready
state so you can do other tasks.
Note This feature is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95.
Note If the product cannot transmit the fax at the scheduled time, it is indicated on the fax call report (if
that option is turned on), or logged in the fax activity log. This can happen in the case of no answer,
or if a busy signal results in the failure of redial attempts. (See Setting fax call report print times and
Printing the fax activity log for more information.)
If you have set a fax to send at a future time but need to add something to it, you can send the
additional information as another job. All faxes scheduled to go to the same fax number on the
same date and time are delivered as individual faxes.
EN Receiving faxes 85
To send a fax at a future time
1Load the document into the ADF input tray.
2Press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to display Fax Functions and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to display Send Fax Later and press menu/enter.
5Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the start time. If you are set to a 12-hour clock, use the
> button to move the cursor past the fourth character to set A.M. or P.M. Select 1 for A.M. or
select 2 for P.M., and press menu/enter.
OR
If you are set to a 24-hour clock, press menu/enter.
6Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the date and press menu/enter.
OR
Accept the default date by pressing menu/enter.
7Type the fax number, enter the speed-dial code, or press the one-touch key. (This feature does
not support ad hoc groups.) Press menu/enter or fax/send. The product scans the document
into memory and sends it at the designated time.
Receiving faxes
You can receive faxes to the product or to your computer. In general, incoming faxes to the product
are automatically answered; however, if you change which devices are connected to the same
phone line that the product is connected to, you will need to change how the product answers
incoming faxes. See Changing how the product answers incoming faxes for instructions. Follow
the procedures in this section to manage faxes routed to the product.
●To receive faxes when you hear fax tones
●To reprint a fax
●To block or unblock fax numbers
To receive faxes when you hear fax tones
If you have a phone line that receives both fax and phone calls, and you hear fax tones when you
answer the phone, you can start the receiving process in one of two ways:
●If you are close to the product, press fax/send on the control panel.
●When you answer any phone connected to the line (an extension phone) and hear fax tones,
the product should begin answering the call automatically. If not, press 1-2-3 in sequence on
the telephone keypad, listen for fax transmission sounds, and then hang up.
Note For the second method to work, the extension phone setting must be set to Yes. See Enabling an
extension phone to check or change the setting.
To reprint a fax
If you want to reprint a fax because the print cartridge was empty or if the fax printed on the wrong
type of media, you can try to reprint it. The actual number of faxes stored for possible reprinting is
determined by the available memory. The most recent fax prints first; the oldest fax prints last.
These faxes are continuously stored, and reprinting them does not clear them from memory. To
clear these faxes from memory, see Deleting faxes from memory.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
86 7 Faxing EN
Note You do not need to use this procedure if the fax does not print because of a jam or because the
media runs out. During these situations, faxes are received to memory. As soon as you clear the
jam or refill the media, faxes automatically resume printing.
Use the following steps to reprint a fax:
1Press menu/enter.
2Press > once to display Fax Functions and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to display Reprint Last and press menu/enter. The product begins
reprinting the most recently printed fax.
Note To stop the printing at any time, press cancel.
To block or unblock fax numbers
If there are people or businesses from whom you do not want to receive faxes, you can block up to
30 fax numbers using the control panel. When you block a fax number and someone from that
number sends you a fax, the display panel indicates the number is blocked, the fax does not print,
and the fax is not saved in memory. Faxes from blocked fax numbers appear in the fax activity log
with a “discarded” designation. You can unblock blocked fax numbers individually or all at one time.
Note The fax activity log feature is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95, but you can print the fax
activity log using the control panel. See Printing the fax activity log.
Note To print a list of numbers you have blocked, see Printing the block fax list.
Use the following steps to block or unblock fax numbers using the control panel:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Block Faxes and press menu/enter.
5Do one of the following:
•To block a fax number, use the < or > button to select Add Entry and press menu/enter.
Enter the fax number exactly as it appears in the header (including spaces) and press
menu/enter. Enter a name for the blocked number and press menu/enter.
•To unblock a single fax number, use the < or > button to select Delete Entry and press
menu/enter. Use the < or > button to select the fax number you want and press
menu/enter to confirm the deletions.
•To unblock all blocked fax numbers, use the < or > button to select Clear All and press
menu/enter. Press menu/enter again to confirm the deletions.
Receiving faxes to your computer
To receive faxes to your computer, you must enable the receive to PC setting in the software (see
the product software Help). If you have a phone line receiving both fax and voice calls (a shared
line) and an answering machine or computer voicemail on the line, you must turn off the answering
machine or voicemail to receive faxes to the computer. If you do not, either the answering system
answers all calls, or the PC fax program does. Because of this limitation, most users choose to
receive faxes to the product.
EN About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes 87
The receive to PC setting can only be activated from the computer. If for any reason that computer
is no longer available or accessible, you can use the procedure below to turn the receive to PC
setting off from the product control panel.
To turn the receive to PC setting off from the control panel
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Functions and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Stop Recv To PC and press menu/enter to confirm your
selection.
4Once the Stop Recv to PC setting has been selected, any faxes still in the product’s
memory are printed.
Note You cannot use the receive to PC feature if the product is networked, or if you are using the Macintosh
software.
About speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
You can store frequently dialed fax numbers or groups of fax numbers as one-touch keys,
speed-dial codes, or group-dial codes.
In the product’s phone book, there are a total of 275 codes available that can be used for
speed-dial codes and group-dial codes. For example, if you program 225 of the codes as
speed-dials, the remaining 50 can be used for group-dials.
See the following procedures for more information about how to use speed-dial codes, one-touch
keys, and group-dial codes:
To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys
Speed-dial codes 1 through 9 are also associated with their corresponding one-touch keys on the
control panel. The one-touch keys can be used for speed-dial or group-dial codes. A maximum of
50 characters can be entered for a single fax number.
Note Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software. For instructions on programming speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
using the product software, see the product software Help.
Use the following steps to program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys from the product’s
control panel:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
4Press menu/enter to select Individual Setup.
5Press menu/enter to select Add.
6Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the speed-dial code number you want to associate with
this fax number, and press menu/enter. Choosing a number from 1 to 9 also associates the
fax number with the corresponding one-touch key.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
88 7 Faxing EN
Note When entering a fax number, you can use a comma (,) for a pause, or the letter R if you want the
product to wait for a dial tone.
7Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the fax number. Include any pauses or other needed
numbers, such as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a
9 or 0), or a long distance prefix.
8Press menu/enter.
9Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter a name for the fax number. To do so, repeatedly press
the alphanumeric button for the letter you need until the letter appears. (For a list of
characters, see Using dialing characters.)
Note To insert punctuation, press the asterisk (*) repeatedly until the character you want appears and
press > to go to the next space.
10 Press menu/enter to save the information.
11 If you have more speed-dial codes or one-touch keys to program, repeat steps 1 through 10.
To delete speed-dial codes and one-touch keys
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
4Press menu/enter to select Individual Setup.
5Use the < or > button to select Delete and press menu/enter.
6Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number of the speed-dial code you want to delete
and press menu/enter.
7Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
To quickly program speed-dial codes or one-touch keys
Note The following procedure cannot be used to program a group-dial code. For group-dial code
instructions, see To program group-dial codes.
Use the following method to program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys easily from the product
control panel:
1On the product control panel, press phone book, enter an unprogrammed speed-dial code
and press menu/enter.
OR
Press an unprogrammed one-touch key. The control panel display will notify you that the
speed-dial code or one-touch key has not been programmed.
2Press menu/enter to program the speed-dial code or one-touch key.
3Enter the fax number and press menu/enter. Include pauses, or other needed numbers, such
as an area code, an access code for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a
long distance prefix. (See Using dialing characters for more information.)
Note When entering a fax number you can use a comma (,) for a pause, or the letter R if you want the
product to wait for a dial tone.
EN Managing group-dial codes 89
4Enter a name for the fax number. To do so, repeatedly press the numeric button for the letter
you need until the letter appears. (See Using dialing characters for a list of characters.)
5Press menu/enter to save the information.
To program a one-touch key for alternate long distance
If you use an alternate long distance carrier, you can program a one-touch key to dial the service’s
access number before a fax number. When you need to use this one-touch key, press it, enter the
fax number, and press fax/send. Both the access number and the fax number are then dialed
together. If the access number is used almost every time you dial a fax, it might be easier to
program the access number as a dialing prefix (see Inserting a dial prefix for more information).
Note Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software (not available in Windows 95). For instructions on programming speed-dial codes,
one-touch keys, and group-dial codes using the product software, see the product software Help.
Use this procedure if the access number has more than 10 characters or if you only occasionally
use the access number.
1Follow steps 1 through 6 of To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys. When entering
the fax number, you might also have to do one or both of the following tasks:
•If you have to wait for an access tone at some point in the number, enter one or more
three-second pauses by pressing pause/redial.
•Enter a personal identification number (PIN), if applicable.
2When you are finished entering the access number, press pause/redial. A pause at the end of
the string tells the product not to dial this number until you dial the fax number.
3Continue with steps 7 through 10 of To program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys.
Managing group-dial codes
If you send information to the same group of people on a regular basis, you can program a
group-dial code to simplify the task. Any available speed-dial codes can be programmed with
group-dial codes. Group-dial codes using numbers 1 through 9 are also associated with the
corresponding one-touch key on the control panel. Any individual can be added to a group. All
group members must have programmed speed-dial codes or one-touch keys assigned to them
before being added to the group-dial code.
Use these instructions to manage your group-dial codes:
To program group-dial codes
To delete group-dial codes
To delete an individual from a group-dial code
Note Speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are more easily programmed from the
software (not available in Windows 95). For instructions on programming speed-dial codes,
one-touch keys, and group-dial codes using the product software see the product software Help.
To program group-dial codes
1Assign a speed-dial code to each fax number you want in the group. (For instructions, see To
program speed-dial codes and one-touch keys.)
2Press menu/enter.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
90 7 Faxing EN
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
5Use the < or > button to select Group Setup and press menu/enter.
6Use the < or > button to select Add Group and press menu/enter.
7Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number you want to associate with this group and
press menu/enter. Choosing 1 through 9 also associates the group with the corresponding
one-touch key.
8Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter a name for the group. See Using dialing characters for
instructions on using the buttons. After the name of the group has been entered, press
menu/enter.
9Press the one-touch key or choose the speed-dial code for the group member you want to add
and press menu/enter. Press menu/enter again to confirm the addition. Repeat this step for
each group member you want to add.
10 When you are finished, press cancel.
11 If you have more group-dial codes to enter, press menu/enter and repeat steps 1 through 10.
To delete group-dial codes
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
4Use the < or > button to select Group Setup and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select Delete Group and press menu/enter.
6Using the alphanumeric buttons, enter the number of the group-dial code you want to delete
and press menu/enter.
7Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
To delete an individual from a group-dial code
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
4Use the < or > button to select Group Setup and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select Del. # in Group and press menu/enter.
6Use the < or > button to select the individual you want to delete from the group.
7Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
8Repeat steps 6 and 7 to delete other individuals from the group.
OR
Press cancel if you are finished.
EN Deleting all phone book entries 91
Deleting all phone book entries
You can delete all speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes that are programmed in
the product.
CAUTION Once speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes are deleted, they cannot be recovered.
To delete all phone book entries
Use the following instructions to delete all speed-dial codes, one-touch keys, and group-dial codes
that are programmed in your product:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press menu/enter to select Phone Book.
4Use the < or > button to select Delete All and press menu/enter.
5Press menu/enter to confirm the deletion.
Using dialing characters
When using the control panel to enter your name in the header or type a name for a one-touch key,
speed-dial code, or group-dial code, press the appropriate numeric button repeatedly until the
letter you need appears. Then, press > to select that letter and move to the next space.
Dialing character table
This table shows which letters and numbers appear on each numeric button when the default
language is set to English.
Button number Characters
11
2 ABCabc
3 DEFdef
4GHIghi
5JKLjkl
6MNOmno
7PQRSpqrs
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
92 7 Faxing EN
To insert a pause or wait
You can insert pauses into a fax number you are dialing or programming to a one-touch key,
speed-dial code, or group-dial code. Pauses are often needed when dialing internationally or
connecting to an outside line.
Press pause/redial to insert a three-second pause in your dialing sequence (models sold in
France insert a two-second pause). A comma appears on the control panel display, indicating the
pause will occur at that point in the dialing sequence.
Inserting a dial prefix
A dial prefix is a number or group of numbers automatically added to the beginning of every fax
number you enter at the control panel or from the software.
By default, this setting is off. You may want to turn this setting on and enter a prefix if, for example,
you have to dial a number such as 9 to get a phone line outside your company’s phone system.
While this setting is on, you can still dial a fax number without the dial prefix by using manual dial.
For instructions, see Using manual dial.
To set the dial prefix
Use the following instructions to set the dial prefix:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press > once to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Dial Prefix and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
6If you choose On, use the numeric buttons to enter the prefix and press menu/enter. You can
use numbers, pauses, and dialing symbols.
8TUVtuv
9 WXYZwxyz
00
* ( ) + - . / , “ *&@
# space #
EN Using fax forwarding 93
Using fax forwarding
You can set your product to forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When the fax arrives at
your product, it is stored in memory. Then your product dials the fax number you have specified
and sends the fax. If it cannot forward a fax because of an error (for example, the number is busy)
and repeated attempts to redial are unsuccessful, your product will print the fax.
If the product runs out of memory while receiving a fax, it will terminate the incoming fax and only
forward the pages and partial pages already stored in memory.
When using this feature, the product must be the one receiving faxes (not the computer) and the
answer mode must be set to Automatic (see Changing how the product answers incoming faxes).
To use fax forwarding
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Forward Fax and press menu/enter.
5Press > to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
6If you choose to turn fax forwarding on, use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the fax number
where you want the fax to go, and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Using fax polling
If someone else has set up a fax to be polled, you can request that the fax be sent to your product
(this is known as polling another machine).
To poll (request a fax from) another fax machine
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Functions and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Polling Receive and press menu/enter.
4Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter the number of the fax machine that you want to request
the fax from and press menu/enter.
5Your product dials the other fax machine and requests the fax.
Enabling an extension phone
With this setting turned on, you can alert the product to pick up the incoming fax call by pressing
1-2-3 sequentially on the telephone keypad. The default is Yes. Turn this setting off only if you have
a service from your telephone company that also uses the 1-2-3 sequence. The service will not
work if it conflicts with the product.
To enable an extension phone
Use the following instructions to enable an extension phone:
1Press menu/enter.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
94 7 Faxing EN
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Extension Phone and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Sending a fax by dialing from a telephone
At times, you might want to dial a fax number from a telephone connected to the same line as the
product. For example, if you are sending a fax to a person whose product is in manual receive
mode, you can call first to let that person know the fax is coming.
To send a fax by dialing from a telephone
1Load the document into the ADF input tray.
2Pick up the handset of a phone connected to the same line as the product and dial the fax
number using either the phone’s or the product’s numeric buttons.
3When the recipient answers, instruct the recipient to start the fax machine.
4When you hear the fax tones, press fax/send to begin transmitting the fax, wait until the
display reads Connecting, and hang up the phone.
Changing the HP LaserJet 3330 product’s volume settings
You can control the volume of the following fax sounds from the product’s control panel:
●The fax sounds associated with incoming and outgoing faxes
●The ring for incoming faxes
For information on controlling general volume settings, see Using the product’s volume controls.
To change the fax sounds (line monitor) volume
1Press volume on the control panel.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
3Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory is Soft.
To change the ring volume
The ring is heard when the device is initially sending or receiving a call. The ring duration length is
based on the local telecom ring pattern length.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Common Settings and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Volume Settings and press menu/enter.
4Press the > button once to select Ring Volume and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select Off, Soft, Medium, or Loud.
EN Changing the default resolution 95
6Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for ring volume is Soft.
Changing the default resolution
Resolution affects the quality, in dots per inch, of documents to be faxed. It also affects the
transmission speed.
Use this procedure to change the default resolution for all fax jobs.
To change the default resolution
1Press resolution to display the current resolution setting.
2Use the < and > buttons to display the desired resolution setting.
3Press menu/enter to save the selection.
Changing the default contrast
To change the default contrast
The default contrast is the contrast normally applied to items being faxed. The slider is set to the
middle as the default contrast setting.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Def. Light/Dark.
5Use the < button to move the slider to the left to make the fax lighter than the original, or use
the > button to move the slider to the right to make the fax darker than the original.
6Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the detect dial tone setting
Normally the product waits for a dial tone before attempting to a dial a fax number. If you are using
the product on the same line as your phone, turn on the detect dial tone setting. This will prevent
the product from sending a fax while someone is on the phone.
To change detect dial tone
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press > once to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Detect Dial Tone and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
96 7 Faxing EN
Note The default set at the factory for detect dial tone is On for France and Hungary, and Off for all other
countries/regions.
Changing how the product answers incoming faxes
The product’s answer mode is set when you set up the product. You only need to change these
settings if you change the devices connected to this phone line.
To set the answer mode to automatic or manual
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Answer Mode.
5Use the < and > buttons to select Automatic or Manual and press menu/enter to save your
selection.
Changing rings-to-answer
When the answer mode is set to automatic, the product’s rings-to-answer setting determines the
number of times the phone rings before an incoming call is answered.
If the product is connected to a line receiving both fax and voice calls (a shared line) with an
answering machine, you may need to adjust the rings-to-answer. The number of rings-to-answer
for the product must be greater than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine. This allows
the answering machine to answer the incoming call and record a message if it is a voice call.
When the answering machine answers the call, the product listens to the call and automatically
answers it if it detects fax tones.
Refer to the fax guide that came with your product to determine the default and recommended
rings-to-answer settings for your country or region.
To set the number of rings-to-answer
To set or change the number of rings-to-answer, use the following steps:
1On the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Rings To Answer and press menu/enter.
5Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the number of rings-to-answer and press menu/enter.
Note If you have an answering machine or computer voicemail connected to this line for the other phone
number (on the single ring pattern), make sure the product’s rings-to-answer is set to a lower number
than the rings-to-answer on the answering machine or voicemail. If it is not, the product will be unable
to receive fax calls.
EN Changing answer ring patterns 97
Changing answer ring patterns
If you subscribe to ring pattern service with your telephone company, you can enable the product
to detect ring patterns. If you do not have ring pattern service, and you change this setting, the
product will not be able to receive faxes.
What is ring pattern service?
Ring pattern service, such as distinctive ring, is available from some local telephone companies. It
allows you to have two or three phone numbers on one line. This costs less than paying for two or
three separate lines. Each of the phone numbers has a different ring pattern. Ring patterns allow
you to answer voice calls and allow the product to answer fax calls.
How do I get the service?
Call your local telephone company to check the availability and to subscribe. The service might not
be available in all areas. Also, your telephone company might use a different name for this service.
If ring pattern service is available and you choose to subscribe to it, remember the following:
●Determine which ring pattern is used for phone calls and which is used for fax calls.
●Make sure the telephone company assigns the correct ring pattern to the fax number. The
product ignores other ring patterns.
How will I know if it is working?
After product installation is complete, ask someone you know to send you a fax. Make sure you
provide the correct fax number.
To change answer ring patterns
Note Do not change the all rings default setting if you do not have ring pattern service from your telephone
company. If you do not have ring pattern service and you change this setting, the product might not
be able to receive faxes.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Answer Ring Type and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select the ring pattern you want the product to use when answering
incoming fax calls and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing the silence-detect mode
This setting controls whether or not you can receive faxes from older-model fax machines that do
not emit a fax signal during fax transmissions. At the time of this publication, these silent-model fax
machines represented very few of the fax machines in use. The default setting is Off. It should be
changed only if you regularly receive faxes from someone with an older-model fax machine.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
98 7 Faxing EN
To change the silence detect mode
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Silence Detect and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off.
Changing autoreduction settings for incoming faxes
If the fit to page option is on, the product automatically reduces long faxes to fit on the product’s
default paper size (up to a 75% reduction), for example from legal to letter size.
If the fit to page option is turned off, long faxes print at full size on multiple pages.
If you have the stamp received faxes option on, you may want to turn autoreduction on also. This
reduces the size of incoming faxes just slightly and prevents the page stamp from forcing a
received fax page onto two pages.
Note Make sure the paper size setting matches the size of paper loaded in the paper input tray. To change
the default paper size, see Changing the default paper size.
To change autoreduction for incoming faxes
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Fit to Page and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for incoming fax autoreduction is On.
Enabling stamp received faxes
The HP LaserJet 3330 product is set up to print the sender’s identification at the top of each
received fax. You can also choose to have your header information included on each received fax
to confirm the date and time the fax was received.
Note This option only applies to received faxes that are printed by the product.
To enable stamp received faxes
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Recv. Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Stamp Faxes and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off and press menu/enter to save your selection.
EN Setting the fax error correction 99
Note The default set at the factory for stamp received faxes is Off.
Setting the fax error correction
Normally, the product monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a
fax. If the product detects an error signal during the transmission and the error correction setting is
on, the product can request that a portion of the fax be resent.
You should only turn error correction off if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and
you want to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning the setting off might be useful when you
are trying to send or receive a fax overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
To change the error correction setting
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < and > buttons to select All Faxes and press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to select Error Correction and press menu/enter.
5Use the < and > buttons to select On or Off and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Note The default set at the factory for error correction is On.
Selecting tone- or pulse-dialing mode
Use this procedure to set the product to tone- or pulse-dialing mode. The default is set to tone.
Leave this as tone unless you know your phone line is incapable of tone dialing.
To select tone- or pulse-dialing
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Press > once to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Dialing Mode and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select Tone or Pulse and press menu/enter to save your selection.
Changing redial settings
If the product was unable to send a fax because the receiving fax machine did not answer or was
busy, the product will attempt to redial based on the redial on busy and redial on no answer
options. Use the procedures in this section to turn these options on or off.
Note The product will, by default, redial if the receiving fax machine is busy but will not, by default, redial
if the receiving fax machine does not answer.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
100 7 Faxing EN
To turn the redial on busy option on or off
The product is set to redial busy numbers five times automatically.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Redial On Busy and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
To turn the redial on no answer on or off
If this option is turned on, the product is set to redial on no answer one time automatically in the
U.S. and Canada, and two times automatically for all other countries/regions.
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Redial-No Answer and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
Using billing codes
If the billing codes feature has been turned on, the user will be asked to input a billing code for
each fax. The billing number will be credited for each fax page that is sent. This includes all types
of faxes except for poll receive, fax forwarding, or PC downloaded faxes. For an ad hoc group or a
group dial fax, the billing number will be credited for each successful fax sent to each destination.
The default setting is off. To print a report showing the total for each billing code, see Printing the
billing codes report.
To turn billing codes on or off
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Send Setup and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Billing Codes and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
Changing the V.34 setting
V.34 is the modem protocol used by the product to send faxes. It is the worldwide standard for
full-duplex modems sending and receiving data across telephone lines at 1,200 or 2,400 bps. The
default setting for V.34 is on.
To turn the V.34 setting on or off
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Fax Setup and press menu/enter.
EN Managing fax logs and reports 101
3Use the < or > button to select All Faxes and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select V.34 and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter.
Managing fax logs and reports
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3330 product, use the following instructions to manage your fax
logs and reports:
●To print the fax activity log
●To set the fax activity log to print automatically
●To print a fax call report
●To set fax call report print times
●To include the first page of each fax on the fax call report
●To print a phone book report
●To print the billing codes report
●To print a T.30 protocol trace report
●To print the block fax list
●To print all fax reports
Printing the fax activity log
On demand, you can print a log of the last 40 faxes. A fax activity log includes the following
information:
●All faxes received to the product
●All faxes sent from the control panel
●All faxes sent from the HP LaserJet Document Manager (for Windows-compatible computers
directly connected to the product)
●All faxes sent from the HP Workplace (for Macintosh-compatible computers directly connected
to the product)
Note The HP LaserJet Document Manager is not supported for Microsoft Windows 95 or for any Macintosh
OS prior to 9.1.
To print the fax activity log
Use the following steps to print a fax activity log:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Activity Log and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Print Fax Log Now. The product exits the Menu settings and
prints the log.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
102 7 Faxing EN
Setting the fax activity log to print automatically
The fax activity log provides a chronological history of the last 40 faxes that were received, sent, or
deleted, as well as any errors that occurred. You can decide whether or not you want the fax log to
print automatically after every 40 entries.
To set the fax activity log to print automatically
Use the following steps to set the fax activity log to print automatically:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Activity Log.
4Press > once to select Auto Log Printing and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter to confirm your selection.
Note The factory default is On.
Printing a fax call report
A fax call report is a brief report indicating the status of the last sent or received fax.
To print a fax call report
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Report and press menu/enter.
4Press menu/enter to select Print Fax Call Now. The product exits the Menu settings and
prints the report.
Note To set the fax call report to print automatically, see Setting fax call report print times.
Setting fax call report print times
A fax call report is a brief report indicating the status of the last sent or received fax. You can set
your product to print a fax call report after the following events:
●Every Fax Error (the default)
●Send Fax Error
●Receive Fax Error
●Every Fax
●Send Fax Only
●Never
Note If you choose Never, you will have no indication that a fax failed to transmit unless you print a fax
activity log.
manuals4you.com
EN Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report 103
To set fax call report print times
Use the following steps to set when the fax call report prints:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Report and press menu/enter.
4Press the > button once to select Print Report and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select the option for when you want the fax call reports to print.
6Press menu/enter to save your selection.
Including the first page of each fax on the fax call report
If this option is turned on, the fax call report will display a thumbnail (50% reduction) of the first
page of the last fax that was sent or received.
To include the first page of each fax on the fax call report
Use the following steps to include the first page of each fax on the fax call report:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Fax Call Report and press menu/enter.
4Use the < or > button to select Include First Page and press menu/enter.
5Use the < or > button to select On or Off and press menu/enter to confirm your selection.
Note The default setting for this option is On.
Printing a phone book report
A phone book report lists the fax numbers that are assigned to the one-touch buttons and
speed-dial and group-dial codes.
To print a phone book report
Use the following steps to print a one-touch, speed-dial, and group-dial report:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Phone Book Report and press menu/enter. The product
exits the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing the billing codes report
The billing codes report prints out a list of all fax billing codes with their total number of faxes.
Note After this report is printed, all billing data is reset to zero.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
104 7 Faxing EN
To print the billing codes report
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Billing Report and press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the report.
Printing a T.30 protocol trace report
This report is used by service technicians to troubleshoot fax transmission issues.
To print a T.30 protocol trace report
1Press enter/menu.
2Use the < or > button to select Service and press enter/menu.
3Use the < or > button to select Print T.30 Trace and press enter/menu.
4Use the < or > button to select Now and press enter/menu. The product exits the Menu
settings and prints the report.
To set T.30 protocol trace report print times
You can set the T.30 protocol trace report to print at the following times:
●Never (the default)
●When an error occurs
●At the end of every sent and received fax
Use the following steps to set the T.30 protocol trace report print times:
1Press enter/menu.
2Use the < or > button to select Service and press enter/menu.
3Use the < or > button to select Print T.30 Trace and press enter/menu.
4Use the < or > button to select when T.30 protocol trace reports will print.
5Press enter/menu to save the selection.
Printing the block fax list
Use this procedure to print a list of the blocked fax numbers. See To block or unblock fax numbers.
To print the block fax list
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select Block Fax List and press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the list.
EN Printing all fax reports 105
Printing all fax reports
Use this procedure to print the following reports at one time:
●Fax activity log
●One-touch, speed-dial, and group-dial report
●Configuration report
●Block fax list
●Billing report (if on)
To print all fax reports
Use the following steps to print all fax reports:
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < or > button to select Reports and press menu/enter.
3Use the < or > button to select All Fax Reports and press menu/enter. The product exits
the Menu settings and prints the reports.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
106 7 Faxing EN
manuals4you.com
EN 107
8Networking
Use this information to learn about using your HP LaserJet 3300 series product with a network:
●Understanding the print server’s features and benefits
●Using network protocols
●Software installation
●Network connection requirements
●Installing the 310x print server
●Installing the network software
●Using HP Web JetAdmin
●Using BOOTP
●Using DHCP
●Moving to another network
●Printing a print server configuration page
●For more information
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
108 8 Networking EN
Understanding the print server’s features and benefits
If you use an HP Jetdirect 310x (or other compatible HP Jetdirect print server) with your
HP LaserJet 3300 printer, you can perform the following tasks:
●Enhance workgroup productivity by placing your printer at a convenient location on the
network while improving network printer performance.
●Connect your printer directly to the network.
●Share scan and print functions with others on the network.
Note You can only attach one printer to the print server. Do not use a USB hub to attach more than one
printer.
Using network protocols
Printing protocols
The HP Jetdirect 310x supports the following printing protocols:
●TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
•Port 9100
•IPP (Internet Printing Protocol)*
•LPD (Line Printer Daemon)*
•FTP (File Transfer Protocol)*
●IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange)
•Novell NetWare*
•IPX peer-to-peer printing (called IPX direct mode)
●DLC/LLC*
●AppleTalk*
* Only print is available over these protocols. The other protocols support printing, scanning and
faxing over the network.
Scanning protocols
The HP Jetdirect 310x supports the following scanning protocols:
●TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
•Port 9100
•Embedded web server’s scan service
●IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange)
•IPX peer-to-peer printing (called IPX direct mode)
Software installation
If you are setting up client-server printing on a Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, XP, or 2000
network, you should use the installation software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 product to
configure your Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, XP, or 2000 print server and then share the printer with
client computers.
EN Network connection requirements 109
If you are setting up peer-to-peer printing on a Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, or 2000 network,
you should use the installation software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 product to
configure each client to print directly to the printer.
Network connection requirements
If you purchased an HP LaserJet 3300 series model other than the HP LaserJet 3320n and are
connecting to a network, you will need a supported HP Jetdirect print server available from HP.
Your choice of print server depends on the type of network connection you have, the number of
devices you want to connect to the print server, and your network protocol.
The following print servers are supported with the HP LaserJet 3300 series and are available from
your local HP dealer or at http://www.buy.hp.com:
Model Product
No. Connectors Firmware
version Supported protocol
HP Jetdirect 75x J6035A Home phoneline 10-Mbits/s
network—with a USB
printer connection.
All TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 170x J3258B (not
supported)
J4102B
10Base-T parallel printer
connection. All TCP/IP (9100 only)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
HP Jetdirect 175x J6035A 10/100Base-Tx USB printer
connection. All TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 300x J3263A
J4101B 10/100Base-Tx (sometimes
called Ethernet and Fast
Ethernet) parallel printer
connection.
H.08.00 or
higher TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 310x J6038A 10/100Base-Tx USB printer
connection. All TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
AppleTalk
HP Jetdirect 500x J3265A BNC, 10/100Base-Tx
parallel printer network
connections—can connect
the product and up to two
other devices to the print
server.
Note: The product is
supported only on Port 1 of
this print server.
J.08.00 or higher TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
AppleTalk
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
110 8 Networking EN
Note HP recommends against using print servers other than those listed above.
You can check the print server’s firmware revision number by printing a configuration report for the
print server. For instructions, see To print a Jetdirect configuration page.
HP Jetdirect 500x J3264A Token Ring 3 twisted pair,
(RJ-45) parallel printer
connections — can connect
the product and up to two
other devices to the print
server.
Note: The product is fully
supported only on Port 1 of
this print server.
J.08.00 or higher TCP/IP (LPD and 9100)
IPX/SPX Peer-to-Peer
Novell NetWare
DLC/LLC
Model Product
No. Connectors Firmware
version Supported protocol
EN Installing the 310x print server 111
Installing the 310x print server
The HP Jetdirect 310x has a single USB port and an RJ-45 network port (10/100Base-Tx) for
connecting to a network. The following items are included with your HP Jetdirect 310x:
●Power module
●Clip (attached to server)
●USB cable
To connect the product to a network
Use the procedure in this section to connect your HP LaserJet 3300
series product to the network using an HP Jetdirect 310x print server.
Note
The instructions below apply to the HP Jetdirect 310x that is included
with the HP LaserJet 3320n. If you are using a different Jetdirect print
server, you must refer to the installation instructions that came with that
print server.
Note
The USB cable should already be connected to the product. (For more
information, see Connecting a printer cable to your product.)
1Plug the rectangular end of the USB cable, with the USB symbol
facing up, into the USB socket on the front of the print server. Make
sure the cable is fully inserted.
2Attach the print server to a 10/100Base-Tx local network by
plugging the network cable into the network port on the rear of the
print server.
3Plug the power module (supplied with the print server) into a power
outlet. Plug the other end of the power module cable into the power
socket on the rear of the print server.
1
2
3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
112 8 Networking EN
4The 10 or 100 LED lights, indicating a network connection, and the
power/status LED should begin blinking. After 15 seconds, the
power/status LED should be solid green.
5Press the test button on the rear of the print server to print a
configuration page. A configuration page should be printed by the
attached printer. If a page does not print or is unreadable, see
Configuration page does not print.
6If you want to mount the print server to the product (or table or wall),
secure the attached mounting clip using the supplied sticky tape or
the mounting screw holes. You can use the location illustrated in
image 6 at left.
4
5
6
EN Installing the network software 113
Installing the network software
After you have successfully connected the HP LaserJet 3300 series product to your network, you
should install or reinstall the software that came with the product. The software must be installed
to take full advantage of the product features and to enable networked printing from each PC.
Note If you are using a previously purchased HP Jetdirect print server, do not install the software that
came with it. Use the software that came with your HP LaserJet 3300 series product.
See the getting started guide that came with the product for complete instructions on installing the
software.
Using the embedded web server
Each HP Jetdirect 310x print server contains an embedded web server that you can access
through a compatible web browser on an intranet. The embedded web server provides access to
configuration and management pages for the print server and the attached printer. The networking
pages provide access to status and configuration information on the HP Jetdirect 310x print
server.
You can use the embedded web server to perform the following tasks:
●Monitor the status of the printer and the print server
●Make configuration changes to the print server to customize it for your network
●Link to HP’s web site
●Scan images over the network without installing the HP LaserJet 3300 series product software
Prerequisites
Computers with the TCP/IP protocol installed can use the embedded web server to monitor and
configure the printers networked with an HP Jetdirect print server. Use the installation program on
the product CD-ROM to set this up.
Before you can use the embedded web server, you must configure an IP address for the HP
Jetdirect print server. Use the installation program on the product CD-ROM to configure the IP
address.
Optionally, you can use BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) or DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) to automatically configure the IP address over the network each time the print server is
turned on.
Compatible web browsers
If you use Windows 9x, or NT 4.0, the embedded web server works with the following browsers:
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0, 5.01, or 5.5
●Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
If you use Windows 2000, ME, or XP, the following browsers are supported:
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or 5.5
●Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
If you use Mac OS 8.6 and later, or 9.0, the following browsers are supported:
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
114 8 Networking EN
●Netscape Navigator 4.6x, 4.7x, 6.0, or 6.1
For the latest list of compatible web browsers, check HP’s Customer Care online at
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
To start the embedded web server
After you establish an IP address on the print server, perform the following steps:
1Run a supported web browser.
2Enter the IP address of the print server as the URL. The print server’s home page displays.
3Click the Help link on the web page for more information.
Note If you change the IP address and other parameters, the connection to the embedded web server
closes. To re-establish a connection, use the new IP address as the URL. Also, some computer
setups may no longer work.
Using HP Web JetAdmin
HP Web JetAdmin is a printer installation and management application for intranets. You can
obtain this software from HP Customer Care online at http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you use HP Web JetAdmin version 6.5 or later for operation
with the print server’s embedded web server.
Using BOOTP
This section describes how to configure the print server using Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
services on servers in some operating systems. BOOTP is used to download network
configuration data from a server to the HP Jetdirect print server over the network.
For BOOTP, the downloaded configuration data may also identify a file containing extended
configuration data. The HP Jetdirect print server downloads this file using TFTP. This TFTP
configuration file may be located on the BOOTP server or on a separate TFTP server.
Automatically downloading configuration data has the following benefits:
●Ease of HP Jetdirect print server configuration. Complete network configuration can be
automatically downloaded each time the print server is powered on.
●Ease of configuration management. Network configuration parameters for the entire network
can be in one location.
●Enhanced configuration control of the print server. Configuration by other methods is limited to
select parameters.
When the print server is powered on, it broadcasts requests that contain its hardware address. A
server daemon searches servers for configuration data with a matching hardware address, and if
successful, sends the corresponding configuration data to the print server as a reply.
The factory-default state of the HP Jetdirect print server is to request its configuration data using
BOOTP requests first, and if no BOOTP reply is received, then to request its configuration data
using DHCP requests.
Note If the print server and the BOOTP, TFTP, or DHCP server are located on different subnets, IP
configuration may fail unless the routing device supports “BOOTP Relay” (allows the transfer of
requests between subnets).
EN Using BOOTP 115
Setting up the BOOTP server
Note For systems using NIS (Network Information Service):
If your server uses NIS, you may need to rebuild the NIS map with the BOOTP service before
performing the BOOTP configuration steps. Refer to your system documentation.
The procedure to set up the DHCP server depends on the operating system on that system. (It
may be a system other than those using the HP Jetdirect print services.)
Windows 2000 or NT servers:
On Windows NT or 2000 server systems, use the Microsoft DHCP utilities to set up print server
configuration through BOOTP.
●When you use the Windows NT DHCP procedure (with the finite lease duration and adding a
reservation in step 8), the resulting service will respond to BOOTP requests as well as to
DHCP requests from the print server. See Windows NT Procedure.
●When you use the Windows 2000 DHCP procedure, the resulting service will respond to
BOOTP requests when you select BOOTP only or Both in step 11d. See Windows 2000
Procedure.
These systems may require third-party software for TFTP support.
UNIX servers:
A BOOTP server running UNIX must be set up with the BOOTP daemon bootpd, and must be set
up with the /etc/bootptab configuration file. The configuration data in the /etc/bootptab file must be
properly entered. See Bootptab file entries.
TFTP is used to obtain additional configuration data from a configuration file on a TFTP server.
This file is specified in the bootptab file; see the T144 tag. See Bootptab file entries.
NetWare BOOTP servers:
For setup of NetWare BOOTP servers, refer to your NetWare documentation.
Bootptab file entries
The following is an example of an /etc/bootptab file entry for an HP Jetdirect print server:
picasso:\
:hn:\
:ht=ether:\
:vm=rfc1048:\
:ha=0001E6123456:\
:ip=192.168.45.39:\
:sm=255.255.255.0:\
:gw=192.168.40.1:\
:lg=192.168.40.3:\
:T144=“hpnp/picasso.cfg”:
A colon (:) indicates the end of a field, and a backslash (\) indicates that the entire entry is
continued on the next line—more fields. Spaces are not allowed between the characters on a line.
Names, such as host names, must begin with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers,
periods (for domain names only), and hyphens. The underline character (_) is not allowed. Refer
to your systems documentation for more information.
The configuration data contains tags that identify the various HP Jetdirect parameters and their
settings. The following table describes these tags:
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
116 8 Networking EN
Tag RFC 2132
Option Description
nodename _ Name of the peripheral device. Identifies an entry point to a list of
parameters for the specific peripheral device. Must be the first field in an
entry. (In the example above, the nodename is picasso.)
hn 12 Host name tag. This tag does not take a value but causes the BOOTP
daemon to download the host name to the print server. The host name will
be printed on the Jetdirect configuration page, or returned on an SNMP
sysName request by a network application.
ht _ Hardware type tag. For this HP Jetdirect print server, set this to ether (for
Ethernet). Must precede the ha tag.
vm _ The BOOTP report format tag (required). Set this tag to rfc1048.
ha _ Hardware address tag. The hardware (MAC) address is the link-level or
station address of the HP Jetdirect print server. It can be found on the
Jetdirect configuration page as the Hardware Address, and also printed on a
label attached to the print server. The ht tag must precede this tag.
ip _ IP address tag (required). This will be the print server's IP address.
sm 1 Subnet mask tag. The subnet mask will be used by the print server to
identify the portions of an IP address that specify the network/subnetwork
number and the host address.
gw 3 Gateway IP address tag. This address identifies the IP address of the default
gateway (router) that the HP Jetdirect print server will use for
communications with other subnets.
ds 6 DNS (Domain Name System) server’s IP address tag. Only a single name
server can be specified.
dn 15 Domain name tag. Specifies the domain name for the print server (for
example, support.hp.com). It does not include the host name—it is not the
Fully Qualified Domain Name (such as printer1.support.hp.com).
ef 18 Extensions file tag that specifies the relative path name of the TFTP
configuration file. This tag is similar to the vendor-specific tag T144.
na 44 Tag for IP addresses of the NetBIOS-over-TCP/IP Name Server (NBNS). A
primary and secondary server may be specified in order of preference.
lease-time 51 DHCP IP address lease duration time (seconds).
tr 58 DHCP T1 timeout, specifying the DHCP lease renewal time (seconds).
tv 59 DHCP T2 timeout, specifying the DHCP lease rebind time (seconds).
EN Using BOOTP 117
Use the following conventions for the bootptab file entries:
●A colon (:) indicates the end of a field.
●A backslash (\) indicates that the entry is continued on the next line.
●Spaces are not allowed between the characters on a line.
●Names, such as host names, must begin with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers,
periods (for domain names only), or hyphens.
●The underscore character (_) is not allowed.
lg 7 syslog server’s IP address tag. It specifies the server to which the print
server sends syslog messages.
T144 _ An HP-proprietary tag that specifies the relative path name of the TFTP
configuration file. Long path names may be truncated. The path name must
be in double quotes (“pathname”). For file format information, refer to the
TFTP file entries below. Note that standard BOOTP RFC-2132 option 18
(extensions file path) also allows the standard tag ef to specify the relative
path name of the TFTP configuration file.
T145 _ Idle Timeout option. An HP-proprietary tag to set the idle timeout (seconds),
which is the amount of time that a print data connection may remain idle
before being closed. The range is 1–3600 seconds.
T146 _ Buffer Packing option. An HP-proprietary tag to set buffer packing for TCP/IP
packets:
0: (default) Normal, data buffers are packed before sending to the printer.
1: Disable buffer packing, data is sent to the printer when received.
T147 _ Write Mode option. An HP-proprietary tag that controls the TCP PSH flag
setting for device-to-client data transfers:
0: (default) Disables this option, flag not set.
1: All-push option. Push bit is set in all data packets.
2: EOI-push option. Push bit is set only for data packets that have an
End-of-Information flag set.
T148 _ IP Gateway Disable option. An HP-proprietary tag to prevent configuration of
a gateway IP address:
0: (default) Allows a gateway IP address.
1: Prevents a Gateway IP address from being configured.
T149 _ Interlock Mode option. An HP-proprietary tag that specifies whether an
acknowledgement (ACK) on all TCP packets is required before the printer is
allowed to close a Port 9100 print connection.
T150 _ TFTP server’s IP address option. An HP-proprietary tag to specify the IP
address of the server where the TFTP configuration file is located.
T151 _ Network configuration option. An HP-proprietary tag to ensure other
dynamic configuration methods are not used:
BOOTP-ONLY: Send BOOTP requests only, not DHCP.
DHCP-ONLY: Send DHCP requests only, not BOOTP.
Tag RFC 2132
Option Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
118 8 Networking EN
See your system documentation or product software help for more information.
Using DHCP
The procedure to set up the DHCP server depends on the operating system on that system. (It
may be a system other than those using the HP Jetdirect print services.)
UNIX servers:
For instructions on setting up DHCP on UNIX systems, see the bootpd man page.
On HP-UX systems, a sample DHCP configuration file dhcptab may be located in the /etc
directory. Since HP-UX presently does not provide Dynamic Domain Name Services (DDNS) for
its DHCP implementations, HP recommends that you set all print server lease durations to infinite.
This ensures that the print server IP addresses remain static until dynamic name services are
provided.
Windows NT 4.0 servers:
You will set up a pool of IP addresses that the server can assign or lease to a requester.
Note To avoid problems resulting from IP addresses that change, HP recommends that all print servers
be assigned IP addresses with infinite leases or reserved IP addresses.
Windows NT Procedure
Note In addition to the general steps provided here, see also the instructions supplied with your DHCP
software.
1On the Windows NT server, open the Program Manager window and double-click the Network
Administrator icon.
2Double-click the DHCP Manager icon to open this window.
3Select Server and select Server Add.
4Type the server IP address, then click OK to return to the DHCP Manager window.
5In the list of DHCP servers, click on the server you have just added, then select Scope and
select Create.
6Select Set up the IP Address Pool. In the IP Address Pool section, set up the IP address
range by entering the beginning IP address in the Start Address box and entering the ending
IP address in the End Address box. Also enter the subnet mask for the subnet to which the IP
address pool applies. The starting and ending IP addresses define the end points of the
address pool assigned to this scope.
Note If desired, you can exclude ranges of IP addresses within a scope.
7In the Lease Duration section, select Unlimited, then select OK.
HP recommends that all print servers be assigned infinite leases to avoid problems resulting
from IP addresses that change. Be aware, however, that selecting an unlimited lease duration
for the scope (as described above) causes all clients in that scope to have infinite leases.
If you want clients on your network to have finite leases, you can instead set the duration to a
finite time, but you should configure all print servers as reserved clients for the scope.
EN Using DHCP 119
8If you have set Lease Duration to Unlimited in the previous step, skip to the next step. If you
have set Lease Duration to a finite time, continue with this step:
Select Scope and select Add Reservations to set up your print servers as reserved clients.
For each print server, perform the following steps in the Add Reserved Clients window to set
up a reservation for that print server:
aType the selected IP address.
bObtain the hardware (MAC) address from the configuration page, and type this address in
the Unique Identifier box.
cInput a client name.
dSelect Add to add the reserved client. To delete a reservation, in the DHCP Manager
window, select Scope and select Active Leases. In the Active Leases window, click on
the reservation you want to delete and select Delete.
9Select Close to return to the DHCP Manager window.
10 If you do not plan to use WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service), skip to the next step. If
you plan to use WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service), continue with this step:
aFrom the DHCP Manager window, select DHCP Options and select one of the following:
Scope: if you want name services only for the selected scope.
Global: if you want name services for all scopes.
bAdd the server to the Active Options list. In the DHCP Options window, select
WINS/NBNS Servers (044) from the Unused Options list. Select Add; then select OK.
A warning may appear requesting that you set the node type. You will do this in step 10d
below.
cNow provide the IP address of the WINS server as follows:
i. Select Value, then Edit Array.
ii. From the IP Address Array Editor, select Remove to delete any undesired addresses
previously set. Then type in the IP address of the WINS server and select Add.
iii. Once the address appears in the list of IP addresses, select OK. This returns you to the
DHCP Options window. If the address you have just added appears in the list of IP
addresses (near the bottom of the window) continue to step 10d below. Otherwise, retry
step 10c.
dIn the DHCP Options window, select WINS/NBT Node Type (046) from the Unused
Options list. Select Add to add the node type to the Active Options list. In the Byte box,
input 0x4 to indicate a mixed node, and select OK.
11 Click Close to exit to the Program Manager.
Windows 2000 servers:
You will set up a pool of IP addresses that the server can assign or lease to a requester.
Note To avoid problems resulting from IP addresses that change, HP recommends that all print servers
be assigned IP addresses with infinite leases or reserved IP addresses.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
120 8 Networking EN
Windows 2000 Procedure
Note In addition to the general steps provided here, see also the instructions supplied with your DHCP
software.
1Run the Windows 2000 DHCP manager utility: Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Open
the Administrative Tools folder and run the DHCP utility.
2In the DHCP window, locate and select your Windows 2000 server in the DHCP tree.
If your server is not listed in the tree, select DHCP and click the Action menu to add the server.
3After selecting your server in the DHCP tree, click the Action menu and select New Scope.
This runs the Add New Scope wizard.
4In the Add New Scope wizard, click Next.
5Enter a name and description for this scope, click Next.
6Enter the range of IP addresses for this scope (beginning IP address and ending IP address).
Enter the subnet mask and click Next.
Note If subnetting is used, the subnet mask defines which portion of an IP address specifies the subnet
and which portion specifies the client device.
7If applicable, enter the range of IP addresses within the scope to be excluded by the server
and click Next.
8Set the IP address lease duration for your DHCP clients and click Next.
HP recommends that all print servers be assigned reserved IP addresses. You can do this
after you set up the scope, as in step 11 below.
9HP recommends that you select [No] to configure DHCP options for this scope later, and click
Next.
If you want to configure DHCP options now:
aSelect Yes and click Next.
bIf desired, specify the IP address of the router (or default gateway) to be used by clients
and click Next.
cIf desired, specify the Domain Name and DNS (Domain Name System) servers for clients
and click Next.
dIf desired, specify WINS server names and IP addresses and click Next.
eSelect Yes to activate the DHCP options now and click Next.
10 You have successfully set up the DHCP scope on this server. Click Finish to close the wizard.
11 To configure your print server with a reserved IP address within the DHCP scope:
aIn the DHCP tree, open the folder for your scope and select Reservations.
bClick the Action menu and select New Reservation.
cEnter the appropriate information in each field, including the reserved IP address for your
print server. (Note: the hardware (MAC) address for your print server is available on the
Jetdirect configuration page.)
dUnder “Supported types,” select DHCP only and click Add. This results in a DHCP
configuration.
Note Selecting Both or BOOTP only results in a BOOTP configuration due to the sequence in which HP
Jetdirect print servers initiate configuration protocol requests.
EN Using DHCP 121
eSpecify another reserved client, or click Close. The reserved clients added will be
displayed in the Reservations folder for this scope.
12 Close the DHCP manager utility.
Configuring the print server for DHCP configuration
Once a DHCP server is set up (according to the previous section), the factory-default state of the
print server requires no further action for print server configuration.
Changing the BOOTP/DHCP configuration method
Other configuration tools that include IP configuration, such as the embedded web server or
Telnet, allow you to disable BOOTP and/or DHCP auto-configuration. In each of these tools, three
possible settings for the configuration method are provided; each of the settings has the effect of
disabling others, as follows:
●BOOTP
The print server automatically releases any names and IP addresses associated with the
DHCP server and re-initializes the TCP/IP protocol for the print server (unless a BOOTP
configuration is currently in effect). At this point, TCP/IP is unconfigured, and the print server
begins to send—even before power is cycled—BOOTP requests to acquire new IP
configuration information. If no BOOTP reply is received, the IP address remains at the factory
default 192.0.0.192. DHCP is disabled.
After power to the print server is cycled, only BOOTP requests are sent and only BOOTP
replies are processed. Any configuration of IP parameters done manually is ignored.
●DHCP
The print server automatically releases any names and IP addresses associated with the
BOOTP server and re-initializes the TCP/IP protocol for the print server (unless a BOOTP
configuration is currently in effect). At this point, TCP/IP is unconfigured, and the print server
begins to send—even before power is cycled—DHCP requests to acquire new IP
configuration information. If no DHCP reply is received, the IP address remains at the factory
default 192.0.0.192. BOOTP is disabled.
After power to the print server is cycled, only DHCP requests are sent and only DHCP replies
are processed. Any configuration of IP parameters done manually is ignored.
●Manual
BOOTP and DHCP are disabled.
You should proceed to manually set all of the IP configuration parameters, including IP
address, subnet mask, default gateway, and idle timeout. You can use the settings available in
the same tool you are using.
CAUTION If the print server is switched from using an address allocated by a DHCP server to using a manually
assigned address, that manually assigned address should be outside any DHCP range used for
other devices on the network. An alternative is to tell the DHCP server that the print server's address
is fixed so that it will never be allocated to another client.
Returning to factory defaults
You can return the print server to its factory-default state (also called “cold reset”) by using the
factory-default reset procedure. See Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold
reset).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
122 8 Networking EN
Moving to another network
When you move an HP Jetdirect print server that is configured with an IP address to a new
network, make sure that the IP address does not conflict with the IP addresses on the new
network. You can change the print server’s IP address to one that can be used on the new
network, or you can erase the current IP address and configure another IP address after you
install the print server on the new network. Cold reset the print server (see Resetting the 310x
print server to factory defaults (cold reset) for instructions).
If the current BOOTP server cannot be reached, you might need to find a different BOOTP server
and configure the printer to that server.
If you used BOOTP or DHCP to configure the print server, edit the appropriate system files with
updated settings. If you manually set the IP address, reconfigure the IP parameters.
Follow the instructions on the appropriate home page to configure or modify your printer. These
instructions show you how to configure your printer and set up the printer for printing.
Note You can substitute the server domain with the TCP/IP address.
Printing a print server configuration page
If you connect your HP LaserJet 3300 series product to a network, use the following instructions to
print out a configuration page with information about your print server.
To print a Jetdirect configuration page
Briefly press the test button on the rear panel of the print server. If you are not sure if the
configuration page is in the process of printing, check the power/status LED. If the page never
appears on the printer (or if it is unreadable), see Configuration page does not print.
For more information on the configuration page, see Interpreting the configuration page.
For more information
For more information on the print server, see the HP support web site for the HP LaserJet 3300
series: http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 (site is in English).
EN 123
9Cleaning and maintenance
Use the topics below to learn about basic cleaning and maintenance tasks:
●Cleaning the outside of the product
●Cleaning the print cartridge area
●Cleaning the printer media path
●Cleaning the pickup roller
●Changing the pickup roller
●Changing the printer separation pad
●Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly
●Removing and replacing the control panel bezel
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
124 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
Cleaning the outside of the product
To clean the exterior
Use a soft, damp, lint-free cloth to wipe dust, smudges, and stains off the exterior of the product.
To clean the glass
Dirty glass, from fingerprints, smudges, hair, and so on, slows down performance and affects the
accuracy of special features such as fit to page and copy.
1Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical socket, and raise the lid.
Note If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Clean the glass with a soft cloth or sponge slightly moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on the glass; these
can damage it. Do not place liquids directly on the glass. They may seep under it and damage the
product.
3Dry the glass with a chamois or cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
Note Dust might appear on the underside of the glass, but this cannot be cleaned and it has no effect on
the copy or scan quality.
To clean the lid backing
Minor debris can accumulate on the white document lid backing located underneath the product’s
lid.
1Turn off the product, unplug the power cord from the electrical socket, and raise the lid.
Note If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Clean the white document lid backing with a soft cloth or sponge slightly moistened with a mild
soap and warm water.
3Wash the backing gently to loosen debris; do not scrub the backing.
4Dry the backing with a chamois or soft cloth.
CAUTION Do not use paper-based wipes as these may scratch the backing.
5If this does not clean the backing well enough, repeat the previous steps using isopropyl
alcohol, and then wipe the backing thoroughly with a damp cloth to remove any residual
alcohol.
EN Cleaning the print cartridge area 125
Cleaning the print cartridge area
You do not need to clean the print cartridge area often. However, cleaning this area can improve
the quality of your printed sheets. During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can
accumulate inside the printer. Over time, this buildup can cause print quality problems, such as
toner specks or smearing. To correct and prevent these types of problems, you can clean the print
cartridge area and the printer media path.
To clean the print cartridge area
WARNING!
Wait for the printer to cool before beginning this procedure.
1Before cleaning the printer, turn the printer off by unplugging the
power cord.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Open the print cartridge door, and remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light. Cover the
print cartridge if necessary. Also, do not touch the black sponge transfer
roller inside the printer. By doing so, you can damage the printer.
3With a dry, lint-free cloth, or an HP toner cloth (part number
5090-3379), wipe any residue from the media path area and the
print cartridge cavity.
4Replace the print cartridge, and close the print cartridge door.
5Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
Note
Do not spray or use water inside the printer.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
1
2
3
5
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
126 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
Cleaning the printer media path
If you are experiencing toner specks or dots on the printouts, clean the printer media path.
To clean the printer media path
1Press menu/enter.
2Use the < and > buttons to find the service menu.
3Press menu/enter.
4Use the < and > buttons to find the Cleaning Mode.
5Press menu/enter.
Cleaning the pickup roller
If the printer regularly mispicks, you might need to change or clean the pickup roller. Before
replacing the pickup roller you may want to try to clean it. To clean the pickup roller, follow the
instructions below:
To clean the pickup roller
Remove the pickup roller as described in steps 1 through 5 of Changing
the pickup roller.
1Dab a lint-free cloth in isopropyl alcohol, and clean the roller with it.
WARNING!
Alcohol is flammable. Keep the alcohol and cloth away from an open
flame. Before you close the printer and plug in the power cord, allow the
alcohol to dry completely.
2Using a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe the pickup roller to remove
loosened dirt.
3Allow the pickup roller to dry completely before you reinstall it in the
printer (see steps 6 through 9 of Changing the pickup roller).
1
2
3
EN Changing the pickup roller 127
Changing the pickup roller
See Ordering HP parts and accessories to order a new pickup roller.
To change the pickup roller
CAUTION
Failure to complete this procedure might damage the printer.
1Unplug the power cord from the printer, and allow the printer to
cool.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Open the print cartridge door, and remove the print cartridge.
3Find the pickup roller.
4Release the small, white tabs on either side of the pickup roller, and
rotate the pickup roller toward the front.
5Gently pull the pickup roller up and out.
1
2
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
128 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
6Position the new or cleaned part in the slot of the previous pickup
roller. See Cleaning the pickup roller for instructions.
Note
Circular and rectangular pegs on each side prevent you from incorrectly
positioning the pickup roller.
7Rotate the top of the new pickup roller away from you until both
sides snap into place.
Note
Touching the black sponge roller may damage the product.
8Reinstall the print cartridge, and close the print cartridge door.
9Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
7
8
9
6
EN Changing the printer separation pad 129
Changing the printer separation pad
If your input tray feeds more than one page at a time, you might need to change the printer
separation pad. Recurring feed problems indicate that the printer separation pad is worn. If your
product is under warranty, call support. If your product is not under warranty, see Ordering
HP parts and accessories to order a new printer separation pad.
Note Before you change the separation pad, clean the pickup roller. See Cleaning the pickup roller for
instructions.
To change the printer separation pad
1Unplug the power cord from the printer, and allow the printer to
cool.
2Verify the power is off.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
3Remove the input trays.
4Find the blue separation pad.
5To pry the separation pad up from the spring-loaded base, insert a
flat-edged screwdriver in the slot under the separation pad and twist
until the tabs are free.
Note
Touching the black sponge roller may damage the product.
2
4
5
3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
130 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
6Reach in through the opening, push the spring-loaded base down
(A) with one hand, and pull the separation pad up (B) with the other
hand.
7With one hand, position the new separation pad in the slot of the
previous separation pad (A). With the other hand, reach through the
input tray opening, and push the spring-loaded base down (B).
Note
The tab on the right is larger to help you position it correctly.
8Snap both sides of the separation pad firmly into place.
CAUTION
Make sure that the separation pad is straight and that there is no space
between the separation pad and the spring-loaded base. If the
separation pad is not straight or you see space on one side, remove the
separation pad, make sure that the larger tab is on the right, reinsert the
separation pad, and snap both sides into place.
9Reinsert the input trays.
10 Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
Note
If the pad is not properly positioned, the printer may be noisy or the
paper will not feed at all.
7
8
9
10
6
EN Installing a new ADF 131
Installing a new ADF
If your HP LaserJet 3300 came without an ADF, you can upgrade it by adding one. The ADF
replaces your current lid, includes a 50-page input tray, and installation takes only a few seconds.
Adding the ADF will save you time and effort when making copies of multiple page documents. If
you are experiencing abnormal media jams in your current ADF, you may need to replace it. See
HP parts and accessories for information on ordering a replacement ADF.
To install a new or replacement ADF
1Remove the flatbed scanner lid by opening it and gently lifting
straight up.
Note
If you are replacing an existing ADF, you must first pull up both hinge
tabs before lifting the ADF up out of the product.
2On the new ADF, unfold the hinges and pull up the tab on each
hinge.
3Install the new ADF by inserting the hinges straight down into the
product.
4Push down both tabs until they click.
1
2
3
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
132 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
5Gently close the ADF lid.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the product, do not allow the ADF lid to fall onto the
flatbed scanner. Always close the ADF lid when the product is not in
use.
6Install the ADF input tray by aligning the two tabs on the input tray
with the two grooves in the ADF lid and sliding the tray into the
grooves until it snaps into place.
6
5
EN Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly 133
Changing an ADF pickup roller assembly
If your ADF has trouble picking paper, you may want to replace the ADF pickup roller assembly.
See Ordering HP parts and accessories to order an ADF pickup roller assembly. To remove the
existing assembly, follow the directions below.
1Unplug the power cord from the printer.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Remove the input tray and open the ADF cover.
3Press the round green button while lifting the green lever. Rotate
the green lever until it stops in the open position. The old pickup
roller assembly should remain on the black surface.
4Remove the old assembly and put the new one in exactly the same
place. The largest roller goes in back, and the gear side will be
away from you.
5Lower the green lever with the flat green part fitting in between the
rollers. Press down on the green lever until a snap is heard.
1
2
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
134 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
6To check for proper installation, lift the green lever until it remains
open. The new pickup roller assembly should be secured to the
lever assembly and should not fall out.
7Make sure that both sides of the assembly are secured by the
green hooks.
8Lower the green lever assembly and close the ADF lid. Reinstall the
input tray.
Note
If you are experiencing abnormal jams in the ADF, you may want to
order a new ADF, or upgrade the ADF copy lid. See Installing a new
ADF.
7
8
6
EN Removing and replacing the control panel bezel 135
Removing and replacing the control panel bezel
1Unplug the power cord from the printer.
Note
If you have a 220V product, turn off the power switch.
2Remove the existing control panel bezel by lifting up on both sides
of the bezel edges until all the snaps are disengaged. Set the old
bezel aside.
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch any components or buttons inside the exposed
control panel area.
3Align the new bezel at the lower notch. The bezel notch should
align to the inside of the printer.
4Press down until all the snaps are engaged, and then press
outward until the bezel is secured.
5Plug the printer in to turn it back on. If you have a 220V product,
turn on the power switch.
1
2
3
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
136 9 Cleaning and maintenance EN
EN 137
10 Media
See the following sections for more information:
●Product media specifications
●Guidelines for using media
●Selecting media for the ADF
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
138 10 Media EN
Product media specifications
HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. The printer accepts a variety of media, such
as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, vellum, and
custom-sized paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and moisture content are important factors
affecting printer performance and output quality.
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in
this user guide. Media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:
●Poor print quality
●Increased media jams
●Premature wear on the printer, requiring repair
For best results, use only HP brand paper and print media. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot
recommend the use of other brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence or
control their quality.
It is possible for media to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce
satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and
humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
Before you purchase a large quantity of media, make sure that it meets the requirements specified
in this user guide and in Guidelines for Paper and Other Print Media. (See Ordering HP parts and
accessories for more information about ordering the guidelines.) Always test media before you
purchase a large quantity.
CAUTION Using media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard’s specifications might cause problems for the
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service
agreements.
Supported media sizes (printer)
The following are the supported media sizes:
●Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
●Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Guidelines for using media
Paper
For best results, use conventional paper. Make sure that the paper is of good quality and free of
cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.
If you are unsure about what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the
label on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to the printer.
Note Do not use letterhead that is printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in some types
of thermography.
Note Do not use raised letterhead.
EN Guidelines for using media 139
Note The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make sure that any colored paper or
preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with the printer temperature (200°C or 392°F for 0.1
second).
Common media problems table
Labels
When selecting labels, consider the quality of the following factors:
●Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the printer’s
maximum temperature.
●Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off
sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
●Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any
direction.
●Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Never
use a sheet of labels that has already been run through the printer.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the printer’s maximum temperature.
Symptom Problem with paper Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion, or problems with
feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too smooth, or
embossed.
Faulty paper lot.
Try another kind of paper between
100 and 250 Sheffield and 4 to 6%
moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, or curl. Stored improperly. Store paper flat in its moisture-proof
wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading. Might be too heavy. Use lighter paper.
Excessive curl, or problems
with feeding. Too moist, wrong grain direction, or
short-grain construction. Use long-grain paper.
Print using the straight-through
output path.
Jamming, or damage to
printer. Cutouts or perforations. Do not use paper with cutouts or
perforations.
Problems with feeding. Ragged edges. Use good quality paper.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
140 10 Media EN
Envelopes
Envelope construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on
envelopes depends on the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the
following factors:
●Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28-pound), or
jamming might result.
●Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl
and should not contain air. Envelopes that trap air may cause problems.
●Condition: Make sure that the envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●Sizes: From 90 x 160 mm (3.5 x 6.3 inches) to 178 x 254 mm (7 x 10 inches).
Envelopes with double-side seams
An envelope with double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope
rather than diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Make sure that the seam
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as shown in the following illustration:
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer: 200°C (392°F). The extra flaps
and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes contributes to good print quality. You should store envelopes flat. If air
is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, the envelope might wrinkle during printing.
Card stock and heavy media
You can print many types of card stock from the paper input tray, including index cards and
postcards. Some card stock performs better than others because its construction is better suited
for feeding through a laser printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 157 g/m2 (42-pound). Paper that
is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor toner fusing, poor print
quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
EN Selecting media for the ADF 141
Note You might be able to print on heavier paper if you do not fill the input tray to capacity and if you use
paper with a smoothness rating of 100 to 180 Sheffield.
Card stock construction
●Smoothness: 135-157 g/m2 (36-to 42-pound) card stock should have a smoothness rating of
100 to 180 Sheffield. 60-135 g/m2 (16- to 36-pound) card stock should have a smoothness
rating of 100 to 250 Sheffield.
●Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 inch) of curl.
●Condition: Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●Sizes: Only use card stock within the following size ranges:
•Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
•Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Card stock guidelines
●If the card stock curls or jams, print using the straight-through output path.
●Set margins at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) away from the edges.
Selecting media for the ADF
ADF specifications
●Input capacity: The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of flat 60 to 90 g/m (16- to 24-pound) plain
paper.
●Media size: Only use plain paper within the following size ranges:
•Minimum: 127 mm x 127 mm (5 x 5 inches)
•Maximum: 215.9 mm x 381 mm (8.5 x 15 inches)
Note Use the flatbed scanner for copying and scanning if the media is fragile, thin, or thick. The flatbed
scanner provides the best copy and scan quality. The ADF is recommended for plain paper copying,
scanning, and faxing (faxing can be done only from the ADF).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
142 10 Media EN
EN 143
11 HP parts and accessories
Use the following topics to find out about ordering parts and accessories for your product:
●Ordering HP parts and accessories
●HP LaserJet print cartridges
●DIMMs (memory or font)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
144 11 HP parts and accessories EN
Ordering HP parts and accessories
HP parts and accessories chart
You can increase the product’s capabilities with optional accessories and supplies. Use
accessories and supplies designed specifically for your HP LaserJet 3300 product to ensure
optimum performance.
Item Description or use Part number
Product
memory Dual in-line memory
module (DIMM) Boosts the product’s ability to handle complex
print jobs or increases available fonts.
●Maximum add on: 64 MB
●Available DIMMs:
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
C7842A
C7843A
C7845A
C7846A
Cables and
interface
accessories
Parallel cables Method of connectivity from product to computer.
●2-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
●3-meter IEEE 1284-B cable
C2950A
C2951A
USB cable Method of connectivity from product to computer.
●2-meter cable 8121-0539
ADF If your printer did not come with an ADF, use this
part number to order one. C9143A
Printer server HP Jetdirect 310x Connects the HP LaserJet 3300n mfp printer to a
network. J6038A
Printing
supplies HP Multipurpose
paper HP brand paper for a variety of uses (1 box of
10 reams, 500 sheets each). HPM1120
HP LaserJet paper Premium HP brand paper for use with HP
LaserJet printers (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets
each).
HPJ1124
HP LaserJet
transparency film HP brand transparency film for use with HP
LaserJet monochrome printers. 92296T (letter)
92296U (A4)
Print cartridges print cartridges Replacement print cartridges for the
HP LaserJet 3300.
●2,500 page cartridge
●3,500 page cartridge
C7115A
C7115X
Supplementary
documentation Guidelines for Paper
and Other Print
Media
A guide to using paper and other print media with
HP LaserJet printers. 5963-7863
EN Ordering HP parts and accessories 145
Power modules (network model only)
Replacement
parts Paper pickup roller Used to pick the paper from the paper input tray
and advance it through the printer. RF0-1008-000CN
Main input tray Used to hold media for the printer. RG0-1121-000CN
Priority input tray Used to feed special media or for printing a first
page. RG0-1122-000CN
ADF input tray Used to feed documents into the scanner. C9143-60102
Separation pad for
the printer Used to keep multiple sheets from feeding
through the printer path. RF0-1014-000CN
ADF pickup roller
assembly Used to pick the paper from the ADF paper input
tray and advance it through the ADF. C7309-60016
ADF If your ADF breaks, use this part number to order
one (includes flatbed scanner lid). C9143-60101
Copy lid If you do not have an ADF and your copy lid
breaks, use this part number to order one. C9124-60117
Item Description or use Part number
Countries/Regions Part number Input rating Output rating
Australia, New Zealand,
Argentina 0950-3172 240 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3358 240 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
China 0950-2806 220 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3347 220 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
Continental Europe 0950-3170 230 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3349 230 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
Japan 0950-3173 100 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3352 100 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
South Korea 9100-5168 220–240 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 625 mA
0950-3351 220 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
South Africa, India 9100-5171 220–250 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 625 mA
0950-3354 220–250 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
United Kingdom, Singapore,
Ireland, Hong Kong SAR 0950-3171 220–240 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3350 220–240 Vac 50 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
146 11 HP parts and accessories EN
Note If two parts are listed for one country/region, either part can be used regardless of output rating.
HP LaserJet print cartridges
This section contains the following information on HP LaserJet print cartridges:
●HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
●To install a print cartridge
●Storing print cartridges
●Print cartridge life expectancy
●Recycling print cartridges
●Saving toner
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new,
refilled, or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design
or control their quality. Service or repair required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will
not be covered under the printer warranty.
If you use a non-HP print cartridge, the printer is unable to report on the number of pages that can
still be printed with the amount of toner left in the cartridge. The toner level estimate will only be an
approximate percentage.
Note The warranty does not apply to defects resulting from software, interfacing, or parts not supplied by
HP.
US, Canada, Latin America,
Taiwan 0950-3169 110–127 Vac 60 Hz 13 Vdc @ 300 mA
0950-3348 110–127 Vac 60 Hz 13 Vdc @ 800 mA
Country/Regions Part number Input rating Output rating
EN HP LaserJet print cartridges 147
To install a print cartridge
Storing print cartridges
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. The shelf life of a
print cartridge in an unopened package is approximately 2.5 years. The shelf life of a print
cartridge in an opened package is approximately 6 months.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light.
To install a print cartridge, use the following steps:
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
1Open the print cartridge door.
2Remove the print cartridge from its packaging, and locate the
sealing tape at the end of the cartridge.
3To remove the sealing tape from the cartridge, grasp the tape and
pull it straight out from the cartridge. Avoid touching any black print
on the tape.
4Insert the cartridge as shown, with the arrows pointing into the
product.
5Close the print cartridge door. The print cartridge engages when
the door is closed.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing or other fabric, wipe off the toner with a dry
cloth. Wash the items in cold water and air dry.
CAUTION
Hot water or heat from a dryer can set toner into fabric.
4
2
3
1
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
148 11 HP parts and accessories EN
Print cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that your print jobs require. When
printing text at 5% coverage, the standard print cartridge (C7115A) lasts an average of 2,500
pages. The extended life print cartridge (C7115X) lasts an average of 3,500 pages. This assumes
that you set the print density to 3 and turn EconoMode off (these are the default settings).
Recycling print cartridges
To reduce landfill waste, Hewlett-Packard has adopted a recycling program for empty print
cartridges. A postage-paid shipping label is inside the new HP LaserJet print cartridge box. Since
1990, the HP LaserJet Print Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than 25 million used
HP LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world’s landfills. To
join this recycling effort, follow the instructions provided in the new print cartridge box.
To install a new HP print cartridge, see To install a print cartridge or follow the instructions included
in the print cartridge box. See the recycling information on the print cartridge box and the HP
Printing Supplies Environmental Program Information included in the print cartridge box.
Saving toner
To save toner, select the EconoMode option in your printer properties settings. While in
EconoMode (Save Toner), the printer uses less toner on each page. Selecting this option will
extend the life of the print cartridge and reduce your cost per page, but it will reduce print quality.
See Print cartridge life expectancy for more information.
DIMMs (memory or font)
If you add a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) to the HP LaserJet 3300 product, you can
perform more complex product tasks or add additional fonts.
Use this information to manage DIMMs with your HP LaserJet 3300 product:
●To test a DIMM installation or removal
●To install a DIMM
●To remove a DIMM
To test a DIMM installation or removal
After installing or removing a memory DIMM, you can test your work by printing a configuration
page and checking the Memory Available shown on the page. For more information, see Printing a
configuration page. This does not apply if you have installed a font DIMM.
EN DIMMs (memory or font) 149
To install a DIMM
CAUTION
Handling a DIMM without wearing a grounded, antistatic device might
damage the DIMM. Do not touch the contacts on the side of the DIMM.
1Turn off the power switch (220V product only), and unplug the
printer.
2Open the print cartridge door and the left side panel.
3Remove the DIMM from the antistatic bag it came in, grasping the
DIMM on the top edge.
4Position the DIMM in front of the slot located inside the left side
panel. The gold contacts should be pointing toward the printer and
the cutouts should be at the top and bottom.
1
2
3
4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
150 11 HP parts and accessories EN
5Carefully press the DIMM into the slot, making sure that it is straight
and pushed in all the way (A). The cam latches, located at the top
and bottom, should rotate inward. To snap the cam latches into
place, press the handles toward each other (B).
6Close the left side panel and the print cartridge door.
7Plug the product back in. If you have a 220V product, turn on the
power switch.
AB
5
7
6
EN DIMMs (memory or font) 151
To remove a DIMM
CAUTION
Handling a DIMM without wearing a grounded, antistatic device might
damage the DIMM. Do not touch the contacts on the side of the DIMM.
1Switch off the power (220V product only), and unplug the product.
2Open the print cartridge door and the left side panel.
3To unlock the cam latches, press them outward (A). Grasp the
DIMM on the edge, gently pull straight out, and remove the DIMM
from the printer (B).
Note
Store the DIMM in an antistatic bag.
4Close the left side panel and the print cartridge door.
5Plug the product back in. If you have a 220V product, switch on the
power.
A B
1
2
3
4
5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
152 11 HP parts and accessories EN
EN 153
12 Troubleshooting printing
problems
Use this section to find tips for solving problems specifically associated with printing.
●Product will not turn on or print
●Pages print but are totally blank
●Pages did not print
●Pages printed, but there was a problem
●Onscreen error messages
●Paper handling problems
●Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen
●Clearing media jams
●Improving print quality
●Control panel error messages
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
154 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Product will not turn on or print
Is the parallel or USB cable working and connected correctly?
The parallel or USB cable might be defective. Try the following:
●Disconnect the parallel or USB cable at both ends and reconnect it.
●Try printing a job that has printed in the past.
●Try using a different IEEE 1284-B-compliant parallel cable or USB cable. See Ordering
HP parts and accessories.
●Contact the manufacturer of your computer about changing parallel port settings to an ECP
(extended capabilities port).
Are other devices running on your computer?
●The HP LaserJet 3300 series product may not share a parallel port. If you have an external
hard drive or network switchbox connected to the same port as the HP LaserJet 3300, the
other device might be interfering. To connect and use the HP LaserJet 3300, you must
disconnect the other device or you must use two ports on the computer.
●You might need to add another interface card. Hewlett-Packard strongly recommends an ECP
parallel interface card.
Is the product getting power?
●If you are using a power strip, make sure the power strip is on. Or, try plugging the product
directly into the power outlet.
●Test the power outlet to make sure it is working.
●If you have plugged the product into a switched outlet, make sure the switch is on.
●If you have a 220V product, make sure the power is switched on.
WARNING! If the product still does not turn on after you try the above tips, it may have a mechanical failure.
Unplug the product from the power outlet and contact HP. Refer to the support flyer that came with
the product for information on contacting HP.
Pages print but are totally blank
Is the sealing tape still in the print cartridge?
The sealing tape may still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge and pull out the
sealing tape. Reinstall the print cartridge. Try printing the file again.
Does the file have blank pages?
The file may have blank pages. Check the file you are printing to determine whether there is
content on all of its pages.
Is the original loaded correctly?
If you are making a copy, the original might be loaded incorrectly. The original must be loaded into
the ADF face up. If loaded print side down, the copy will print out blank.
EN Pages did not print 155
Pages did not print
Is there a message on your computer screen?
See Onscreen error messages for more information.
Is media being pulled into the printer correctly?
See Paper handling problems for more information.
Are there media jams?
See Paper handling problems for more information.
Pages printed, but there was a problem
Is the print quality poor?
See Improving print quality for more information.
Is the printed page different than what appeared onscreen?
See Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen for more information.
Are the printer settings appropriate for the media?
See Paper handling problems for more information.
Onscreen error messages
Printer not responding/error writing to LPT1
Check the following:
●Is the product in its Ready state?
●Are the power cord and parallel or USB cable correctly connected?
Try the following:
●Disconnect the power cord and parallel or USB cable at both ends and reconnect them.
●Use another IEEE 1284-B-compliant parallel or USB cable.
Cannot access port (in use by another application)
There is a device conflict. This might occur if another device is installed on your computer and
running status software. The status software dominates the parallel port on the computer and will
not allow the HP LaserJet 3300 to access the port.
Try the following:
●Disable all of the status windows for other printers.
●Make sure that the printer’s port setting is correct. Access the port settings on the Printer
Properties Details tab.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
156 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Paper handling problems
Print is skewed (crooked)
Are the media guides adjusted properly?
Adjust the media guides to the width and length of the media that you are using and try reprinting.
See Product media specifications or Installing and loading the media input trays for more
information.
See Page skew for more information.
More than one sheet feeds at one time
Is the media input tray too full?
See Installing and loading the media input trays for more information.
Is the media wrinkled, folded, or damaged?
Make sure the media is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. Try media from a new or different
package.
Is the printer separation pad worn?
See Changing the printer separation pad for more information.
Product does not pull media from the media input tray
Is the product in manual feed mode?
Try one of the following:
●If Manual Feed appears in the control panel display, press menu/enter to print the job.
●Make sure that the printer is not in manual feed mode and print your job again.
Is the pickup roller dirty or damaged?
Clean or replace the pickup roller and print your job again. See Cleaning the pickup roller or
Changing the pickup roller for instructions.
Media curls when fed through product
●Open the straight-through output door to print straight through.
●See Curl or wave for more information.
Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen
Is the text garbled, incorrect, or incomplete?
First, print a configuration page to verify the product is functioning. See Printing a configuration
page for instructions. If it prints successfully, try the following:
●Disconnect the cable and reconnect it at both ends.
EN Printed page is different from what appeared onscreen 157
●Try printing a job that you has printed correctly.
●If possible, attach the cable and printer to another computer, and try printing a job that you
know has printed correctly.
●Try using a new IEEE 1284-B-compliant parallel or USB cable. See Ordering HP parts and
accessories for information.
●The wrong printer driver might have been selected when the software was installed. Make
sure that the HP LaserJet 3300 is selected in the printer properties.
●There might be a problem with your software application. Try printing from another software
application.
Are graphics or text missing? Are there blank pages?
●Make sure that your file does not contain blank pages.
●The sealing tape might still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge, and pull out
the sealing tape.
●Reinstall the print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for instructions.
●To check the product, print a configuration page. See Printing a configuration page for
instructions.
●The graphic settings in the printer properties might not be correct for the type of job that you
are printing. Try a different graphic setting in the printer properties. See Changing settings
from your computer for more information.
●The printer driver might not work for the type of job that you are printing. Try using a different
printer driver.
Note If you use a different printer driver, some product features may not be accessible.
Is the page format different than on another printer?
If you used an older or different printer driver (printer software) to create the document or the
printer properties settings in the software are different, the page format might change when you try
to print using your new printer driver or settings. To help eliminate this problem, try the following:
●Create documents and print them using the same printer driver (printer software) and printer
properties settings regardless of which HP LaserJet printer you use to print them.
●Change the resolution, paper size, font settings, and other settings. See Changing settings
from your computer for more information.
Is graphics quality poor?
The graphics settings might be unsuitable for your print job. Try the following:
●Check the graphic settings, such as resolution, in the printer properties and adjust them as
necessary. See Changing settings from your computer for more information.
●Try using a different printer driver (software).
Note If you use a different printer driver, some product features may not be accessible.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
158 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Clearing media jams
●Make sure you are printing with media that meets specifications. See Product media
specifications for more information.
●Make sure that you are printing with media that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged.
●Make sure that the printer is clean. See Cleaning the printer media path for more information.
●If you are printing to the straight-through output path, close and open the door again to make
sure the green release levers are closed.
To clear a media jam
CAUTION
Media jams might result in loose toner on the page. If you get any toner
on your clothes, wash them in cold water. Hot water will permanently set
the toner into the fabric.
1Open the print cartridge door and the straight-through output door.
2Rotate the green pressure release levers at the back of the product
downward. If you can remove the media from the front of the
machine without removing the print cartridge, do so, and continue
with step 4.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light.
3Remove the print cartridge, and place it aside.
4With both hands, grasp the side of the media that is most visible
(this includes the middle), and carefully pull it free from the printer.
5When you have removed the jammed media, replace the print
cartridge, and close the print cartridge door and the
straight-through output door.
Note
The pressure release levers automatically close when you close the
straight-through output door.
After clearing a media jam, you might need to turn the printer off and
turn it back on.
Note
When you add new media, remove all of the media from the input tray
and straighten the stack of new media.
1
2
3
4
EN Clearing media jams 159
To clear other media jams
If the paper has crumpled and jammed in the back of the product, open the straight-through output
door. Gently pull the paper out of the rollers. Close the straight-through output door.
If the paper has jammed where it exits the product, grasp the leading edge of the paper and pull
the paper out through the output tray.
Note If you turned the product off before clearing the paper jam, turn it back on, and then restart your
printing or copying job.
If the paper has jammed in the ADF, see Clearing ADF media jams.
Tips to avoid media jams
●Make sure the input tray is not overfilled. The input tray capacity varies depending on the type
of paper you are using.
●Check that the input tray is in place.
●Do not add paper to the input tray while the product is printing.
●Use recommend paper types. See Product media specifications for more information on paper
types.
●Do not let paper stack up in the output tray. The paper type and the amount of ink used affect
the output tray’s capacity.
●Check the power connection. Make sure the power cord is firmly connected to both the
product and the power supply box. Plug the power cord into a grounded AC power outlet.
Note HP does not recommend the use of uninterrupted power supply (UPS) battery backup devices or
surge suppressors with this product. Many surge suppressors and battery backups can cause print
defects.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
160 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Improving print quality
This section provides information about identifying and correcting print defects.
Light print or fade
●The toner supply is low. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for more information.
●The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
too moist or too rough). See Product media specifications for more information. If the whole
page is light, the print density adjustment is too light or EconoMode might be turned on. Adjust
the print density and disable EconoMode in the printer properties. See Saving toner for more
information.
Toner specks
●The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
too moist or too rough). See Product media specifications for more information.
●The printer might need to be cleaned. See Cleaning the printer media path for instructions.
Dropouts
●A single sheet of media might be defective. Try reprinting the job.
●The media’s moisture content is uneven or the media has moist spots on its surface. Try
printing with new media. See Product media specifications for more information.
EN Improving print quality 161
●The media lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try
a different type or brand of media.
●The print cartridge might be defective. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for more information.
●Check Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and make sure it is set to the
appropriate media. See Optimizing print quality for media types for instructions.
Note If these steps do not correct the problem, contact an HP-authorized dealer or service representative.
See the support flyer that came with your product for more information on contacting HP.
Vertical lines
●Make sure that the priority input tray is in place.
●The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge has probably been scratched. Install a new
HP print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for instructions.
Gray background
●Make sure that the priority input tray is in place.
●Decrease the print density setting through HP LaserJet Device Configuration. This decreases
the amount of background shading. See the product software Help.
●Change the media to a lighter basis weight. See Product media specifications for more
information.
●Check the printer’s environment. Very dry (low humidity) conditions can increase the amount
of background shading.
●Install a new HP print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for instructions.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
162 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Toner smear
●The fuser temperature might be too low. Check Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer
driver, and make sure it is set to the appropriate media. See Optimizing print quality for media
types for instructions.
●If toner smears appear on the leading edge of the media, the media guides might be dirty.
Wipe the media guides with a dry, lint-free cloth. See Cleaning the printer media path for more
information.
●Check the media type and quality.
●Try installing a new HP print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for instructions.
Loose toner
●Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and choose the media that you are
using. See Optimizing print quality for media types for instructions. This feature is also
available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the product software Help for details.
●Clean the inside of the printer. See Cleaning and maintenance for instructions.
●Check the media type and quality. See Product media specifications for more information.
●Try installing a new HP print cartridge. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for instructions.
●Plug the printer directly into an AC outlet instead of into a power strip.
Vertical repetitive defects
●The print cartridge might be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs at the same spot on the
page, install a new HP print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for instructions.
EN Improving print quality 163
●The internal parts might have toner on them. See Cleaning and maintenance for more
information. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will probably correct
itself after a few more printed pages.
●Select Optimize for: in the Paper tab of your printer driver, and choose the media that you are
using. See Optimizing print quality for media types for instructions. This feature is also
available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the product software Help for details.
Misformed characters
●If characters are improperly formed, producing hollow images, the media stock might be too
slick. Try a different media. See Product media specifications for more information.
If characters are improperly formed, producing a wavy effect, the printer might need service. Print
a configuration page. See Printing a configuration page for more information. If the characters are
improperly formed, contact an HP-authorized dealer or service representative. See the support
flyer that came with your product for more information on contacting HP.
Page skew
●Make sure that the media is loaded correctly and the media guides are not too tight or too
loose against the media stack. See Installing and loading the media input trays for more
information.
●The ADF input tray might be too full. See Loading originals to copy or scan for more
information.
●Check the media type and quality. See Product media specifications for more information.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
164 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Curl or wave
●Check the media type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity cause media to curl.
See Product media specifications for more information.
●The media might have been in the input tray too long. Turn over the stack of media in the tray.
Also, try rotating the media 180° in the input tray.
●Open the straight-through output door and try printing straight through.
●The fuser temperature might be too high. See Optimizing print quality for media types for
instructions. This feature is also available in HP LaserJet Device Configuration. See the
product software Help for details.
You can also adjust the fuser temperature from the product control panel. The Less Paper Curl
setting in the Service menu sets the fuser temperature to the lowest setting. Its default setting is
off. Use the instructions below to turn this setting on.
1On the control panel, press menu/enter.
2Using the < and > buttons, select Service and press menu/enter.
3Using the < and > buttons, select Less Paper Curl and press menu/enter.
Wrinkles or creases
●Make sure that media is loaded properly. See Installing and loading the media input trays for
more information.
●Check the media type and quality. See Product media specifications for more information.
●Open the straight-through output door and try printing straight through.
●Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also, try rotating the media 180° in the input tray.
manuals4you.com
EN Control panel error messages 165
Toner scatter outline
●If large amounts of toner have scattered around the characters, the media might be resisting
the toner. (A small amount of toner scatter is normal for laser printing.) Try a different media
type. See Product media specifications for more information.
●Turn over the stack of media in the tray.
●Use media designed for laser printers. See Product media specifications for more information.
Control panel error messages
Door Open or No Print Cartridge
The print cartridge door is open or there is no print cartridge in the product’s print cartridge cavity.
Make sure you have correctly installed a print cartridge into your product. For instructions on
installing the print cartridge, see Installing a print cartridge. After checking the print cartridge,
close the print cartridge door securely. When the problem is solved, the product either completes
the current job or returns to its Ready state.
Printer Tray is Empty, Add Paper
The product is out of paper. Load paper into the media input tray or the priority input tray. For
instructions on loading the media input trays, see Installing and loading the media input trays. If
media is already loaded, remove it, check for and remove any jams, and reload the input tray.
When the problem is solved, the product either completes the current job or returns to its Ready
state.
Critical error messages
The current copying or scanning job stops and one of the following messages is displayed on the
product’s control panel:
●50 Fuser Error
●51 Laser Error
●52 Scanner Error
●57 Fan Error
●79 Service Error
●CCD Scanner Error
●Scanner Bulb Failure
If your product displays one of these message, the product is experiencing a critical device error.
Unplug the printer for five minutes, and then plug it back in. If the error persists, contact HP
customer service at the number provided on the support flyer included with the product, or visit
http://www.hp.com.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
166 12 Troubleshooting printing problems EN
Alert messages
The following messages are generic alert messages that may appear in the control panel display.
●Printer Mispick (Enter) To Resume
●Printer Jam. Clear Paper Path
●Door Open Or No Print Cartridge
●Printer Tray Is Empty. Add Paper
●Document Feeder Mispick. Reload
●Doc Feeder Jam. Clear, Reload
●Memory Low. Press [Cancel]
Alert messages communicate to the user that some action must be performed, such as adding
paper or clearing a jam. When an alert message appears, the product will automatically stop the
current task, display the error message, and wait for the user to attend to the situation. Once the
user has corrected the error, the device will either complete the task or go back to the Ready state.
The exception to this rule is when the user wants to enter the main menu system. In this instance
the device will change the display and allow the user to enter the menu system.
Note If the alert message pertains to clearing a jam, see Clearing media jams for more information.
Warning messages
The following messages are generic warning messages that may appear in the control panel
display.
●Not Enough Memory. Try Later
●Device Busy. Try Again Later
●Settings Cleared
●Device Error. [Enter] To Cont.
●Page Too Complex [Enter] To Cont.
Warnings are messages that are important enough that the user must be notified. They are
transient in nature, but may affect the completion of the task or the quality of the output. When a
warning message appears, the active job might cancel. The message will display for five seconds.
If the warning messages are related to print, and the auto continue setting is on, the message will
display for 10 seconds. If there is no response from the user by either pressing enter/menu or
cancel, the device will continue processing the print job. If auto continue is off, the print related
warning messages will display until the user has either pressed enter/menu to proceed or cancel
to cancel the job.
Note Auto continue is set in the printer driver. To find out whether auto continue is enabled, print a
configuration page. See Printing a configuration page for more information.
manuals4you.com
EN 167
13 Troubleshooting copy problems
Use these topics to find tips for solving common copy problems.
●No copy came out
●Copies are blank, or images are missing or faded
●Improving copy quality
●Clearing ADF media jams
●Identifying and correcting copy defects
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
168 13 Troubleshooting copy problems EN
No copy came out
Is media loaded in the input tray?
Load media in the printer. See Installing and loading the media input trays for more information.
Is the original loaded correctly?
Make sure that the original is loaded correctly:
●ADF input tray: The original should be loaded top down in the ADF input tray, with the side to
be copied facing up. See Loading originals to copy or scan for more information.
●Flatbed scanner: Place original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top left
corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Is the wrong device selected?
In HP LaserJet Copy Plus, make sure that the printer you are intending to use is selected in the
Printer field as the current device when you press start/copy.
Copies are blank, or images are missing or faded
Is the sealing tape still in the printer print cartridge?
The sealing tape might still be in the print cartridge. Remove the print cartridge, pull out the
sealing tape, and reinstall the print cartridge. See Installing a print cartridge for more information.
Is the print cartridge low on toner?
Copies are made using the printer. If the print cartridge is low on toner, the copies will be faded.
Is the original of poor quality?
The accuracy of the copy depends on the quality and size of the original. Try adjusting the contrast
with HP LaserJet Copier. See Using HP LaserJet Copier software for instructions. If your original
is too light, the copy might not be able to compensate, even if you adjust the contrast.
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds might cause images in the foreground to blend too much or the background
to appear in a different shade. Try using HP LaserJet Copier to adjust the settings before copying
or to enhance the image after it has been copied. See Using HP LaserJet Copier software for
instructions.
Improving copy quality
This section provides information on the following topics:
●Preventing problems
●Identifying and correcting copy/scan defects
Preventing problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy quality:
EN Clearing ADF media jams 169
●Copy from the flatbed scanner. This will produce a higher quality copy than copying from the
ADF.
●Use quality originals.
●Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear
images and problems with the OCR application. See Installing and loading the media input
trays for instructions.
●Open or close the straight-through output door on the product to accommodate the copy job. If
you are copying to standard weight media, use the output bin (door closed). If you are copying
to heavy media, use the straight-through output path (door open).
●If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, replace the separation pad. For
more information, see Changing the printer separation pad.
●Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
Note Recurring feed problems indicate the copier/separation pad is worn. See Ordering HP parts and
accessories to order a new separation pad. See Changing the printer separation pad for more
information about replacing the separation pad.
Clearing ADF media jams
To clear a media jam from the ADF
Occasionally, media becomes jammed during a copy, scan, or fax job. Some of the causes include
the following:
●The ADF input tray is loaded improperly or is too full. See Loading originals to copy or scan for
more information.
●The media does not meet HP specifications. See Selecting media for the ADF for more
information.
You are notified of a media jam by an error in the software and a Document Feeder Jam
message in the control panel display.
Typical ADF jam locations
●Input tray areas: If the page is still sticking out of the input tray, gently try to remove it from the
input tray without tearing the page. If you feel resistance, see Removing a jammed ADF page
for instructions.
●Output paths: If the page is sticking out of the output bin, gently try to remove it without tearing
the page. If you feel resistance, see Removing a jammed ADF page for instructions.
●Intermediate location: If the page is sticking out of both the input tray and into the output area,
see Removing a jammed ADF page for instructions.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
170 13 Troubleshooting copy problems EN
Removing a jammed ADF page
1Remove the ADF input tray and open the ADF cover.
2Remove the jam cleanout part. Using both hands, lift up on the two
handles until the part unsnaps. Rotate and lift out the cleanout and
set aside.
3Lifting the green lever, rotate the pick mechanism until it stays open.
4Gently try to remove the page without tearing it. If you feel
resistance, go to the next step.
5Open the ADF lid and gently loosen the media using both hands.
6When the media is free, gently pull it out in the direction shown.
1
2
3
4
5
6
EN Identifying and correcting copy defects 171
Identifying and correcting copy defects
Vertical white or faded stripes
●The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
too moist or too rough). See Product media specifications for more information.
●The toner might be low. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for instructions.
7Close the lid to the flatbed scanner.
8Lower the green lever.
9Reinstall the cleanout by inserting it as shown. Push down on the
two tabs until the part snaps into place. It is important to install the
cleanout correctly, as future jamming might occur if the cleanout is
not properly placed.
10 Close the ADF lid and replace the ADF input tray.
7
8
9
10
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
172 13 Troubleshooting copy problems EN
Blank pages
●The original might have been loaded upside down. In the ADF, load the original with the
narrow side forward and the side to be scanned facing up. See Loading originals to copy or
scan for instructions.
●If you are getting blank pages when scanning from the flatbed scanner, make sure the original
document is loaded correctly. Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
●The media might not meet Hewlett-Packard’s media specifications (for example, the media is
too moist or too rough). See Product media specifications for more information.
●The toner might be out. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for instructions.
●The tape might not have been removed from the print cartridge. See HP LaserJet print
cartridges for instructions.
Too light or dark
●Try adjusting the settings.
•HP LaserJet Copier: see Using HP LaserJet Copier software for more information.
•Make sure you have the correct copy quality settings. See Adjusting copy quality for the
current job for more information.
●You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Unwanted lines
●Make sure the priority input tray is in place.
●Try cleaning the flatbed scanner. See Cleaning the outside of the product for instructions.
●The photosensitive drum inside the print cartridge may have been scratched. Install a new HP
print cartridge. See HP LaserJet print cartridges for instructions.
Black dots or streaks
●Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the ADF or flatbed scanner.
Try cleaning the product. See Cleaning the outside of the product for instructions.
Unclear text
●Try adjusting the settings.
•HP LaserJet Copier: see Using HP LaserJet Copier software for more information.
•Make sure you have the correct quality settings. See Adjusting copy quality for the current
job for more information.
●You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
EN Identifying and correcting copy defects 173
Reduced size
●The HP software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image.
●See the product software Help for more information about changing the settings in HP
LaserJet Director and HP LaserJet Document Manager.
●See Using HP LaserJet Copier software for more information about changing the settings for
HP LaserJet Copier.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
174 13 Troubleshooting copy problems EN
EN 175
14 Troubleshooting scanning
problems
Use these topics to find tips for solving common scanning problems.
●Scanned image is of poor quality
●Part of the image did not scan or text is missing
●The text cannot be edited
●The scan takes too long
●Error messages appear on the screen
●The scanner did nothing
●Improving scan quality
●Identifying and correcting scan defects
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
176 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems EN
Scanned image is of poor quality
Is the original a second generation photo or picture?
Reprinted photographs, such as those in newspapers or magazines, are printed using tiny dots of
ink that make an interpretation of the original photograph, which dramatically decreases the
quality. Often, the ink dots form unwanted patterns that, when scanned and reprinted or displayed,
can be detected. If the following suggestions do not solve your problem, you might need to use a
better quality version of the original.
●To eliminate the patterns, try reducing the size of the image after scanning. See Enhancing
images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center for more information.
●Print the scanned image to see if the quality is better.
●Make sure that your resolution and color settings are correct for the type of scan job that you
are performing. See Scanner resolution and color for more information.
●For best results, use the flatbed scanner, not the ADF, for scanning.
Is the image quality better when printed?
The image displayed on the screen is not always an accurate representation of the quality of the
scan.
●Try adjusting the settings on your computer monitor to display more colors (or levels of gray).
Typically, you make this adjustment by selecting Display, found on the Windows Control Panel.
●Try adjusting the resolution and color settings in the scanner software. See Scanner resolution
and color for more information.
Is the image skewed (crooked)?
The original might have been loaded incorrectly. It is important to use the media guides when you
load the originals into the ADF. See Loading originals to copy or scan for more information.
Does the scanned image have blots, lines, vertical white stripes, or any
other defect?
See Improving scan quality for more information.
Is the scanner dirty?
If the scanner is dirty, the image produced will not have optimum clarity. See Cleaning the outside
of the product for instructions.
Do graphics appear different from the original?
The graphics settings might not be suitable for the type of scan job that you are performing. Try
changing the graphics settings, see Changing settings from your computer for more information.
Part of the image did not scan or text is missing
Was the original loaded correctly?
Make sure that you loaded the original correctly. See Loading originals to copy or scan for
instructions.
EN The text cannot be edited 177
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend too much. Try adjusting the
settings before you scan the original or enhancing the image after you scan the original. See
Scanner resolution and color for more information.
Is the original longer than 381 mm (15 inches)?
The maximum scannable length is 381 mm (15 inches) using the ADF. If the page exceeds the
maximum length, the scanner stops. Copies can be longer.
CAUTION Do not try to pull the original from the ADF; you might damage the scanner or your original. See
Clearing ADF media jams for instructions.
Is the original too small?
The minimum size supported in the ADF for the HP LaserJet 3300 is 127 by 127 mm (5 by 5
inches). The original might be jammed. See Clearing ADF media jams for instructions.
Are you using HP LaserJet Director?
Your default property settings for HP LaserJet Director might be set to automatically perform a
specific task other than the one you are attempting. For example, you can set HP LaserJet
Director to automatically perform a scan to e-mail. This means that your image does not show up
on the screen but is attached to an e-mail message as a file. See the product software Help for
instructions on changing the properties in HP LaserJet Director.
Is the paper size correct?
In Scan settings (in the HP LaserJet Scan Control Viewer), make sure that the input paper size is
large enough for the document that you are scanning.
Did you check for missing text in selected regions?
Scan your document in page-by-page mode and make sure that missing text is in a selected
region. If you are performing an OCR operation on a document, colored text does not scan well, if
at all.
The text cannot be edited
Is the product software set to edit text (OCR)?
Text remains as a single image until the Optical Character Recognition (OCR) application converts
the single image into text that you can edit. See Scanning with OCR for more information.
Was the original loaded correctly?
For OCR, the original must be loaded top forward and face up into the ADF. If using the flatbed
scanner, make sure to load originals correctly. Place the original document face down on the
flatbed scanner with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the
glass.
Are you using the correct word processing application?
Your OCR application might be linked to a word processing application that does not perform OCR
tasks. See the product software Help for more information about linking applications.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
178 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems EN
Does the original have tightly spaced text?
●The OCR application might not recognize text that is tightly spaced. For example, if the text
that the OCR application converts has missing or combined characters, rn might appear as m.
●Text may be classified as a graphic and therefore not converted to text.
Is the original of poor quality?
The accuracy of the OCR application depends on the image quality, text size, and structure of the
original and the quality of the scan itself. Make sure that your original has good image quality.
Does the original have a colored background?
Colored backgrounds can cause images in the foreground to blend too much. Try adjusting the
settings before you scan the original or enhancing the image after you scan the original. See
Scanner resolution and color for more information. If you are performing an OCR operation on a
document, colored text does not scan well, if at all.
The scan takes too long
Is your resolution or color level set too high?
If you set the resolution and color level too high, the scan job takes longer and results in larger
files. To obtain good results when scanning or copying, it is important that you use the correct
resolution and color level settings for your job. See Scanner resolution and color for more
information.
Is your software set to scan in color?
Your system defaults to color, which takes longer to scan even if you are scanning a monochrome
original. If you acquire an image through TWAIN, you can change the settings to scan in
grayscale. See the product software Help for details.
Did you send a print or copy job before you tried to scan?
If you sent a print or copy job before you tried to scan, the scan will start if the scanner is not busy.
However, the printer and scanner share memory, which means that the scan might be slower.
Is your computer set for bi-directional communication?
See the documentation that came with your computer to change the BIOS settings. The
recommended bi-directional setting for the parallel port is ECP. USB is always bi-directional.
Error messages appear on the screen
Unable to activate TWAIN source
If you are acquiring an image from another device, such as a digital camera or another scanner,
make sure that the other device is TWAIN compliant. Non-TWAIN-compliant devices do not work
with the HP LaserJet 3300 product software.
Make sure that you have connected the USB or parallel cable to the correct port on the back of
your computer. If you have another port, try attaching the cable to the other port. Make sure that
you have an SPP-(bidirectional) or ECP-compliant parallel port on your computer. An SPP parallel
port is the minimum; an ECP parallel port is strongly recommended. See the documentation that
came with your computer for more information about your port.
EN The scanner did nothing 179
Some devices might not share the parallel port with the printer. If you have an external hard drive,
or network switchbox connected to the same USB or parallel port as the HP LaserJet 3300, the
other device might be interfering. To connect and use the HP LaserJet 3300, you must disconnect
the other device or you must use two ports on the computer. You might need to add another
parallel interface card. Hewlett-Packard strongly recommends an ECP parallel interface card. See
the documentation that came with your computer for more information about installing an
additional parallel interface card or resolving device conflicts.
Verify that the correct TWAIN source is selected. In the software, check the TWAIN source by
selecting Select Scanner from the File menu.
The scanner did nothing
Is the original loaded correctly?
Make sure that the original is loaded correctly:
●ADF input tray: Top down in the ADF input tray, and the side to be scanned facing up. See To
load originals into the ADF input tray for more information.
●Flatbed scanner: Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner with the top
left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Improving scan quality
This section provides information on the following topics:
●Preventing problems
●Identifying and correcting scan defects
Preventing problems
The following are a few simple steps you can take to improve copy and scan quality:
●Use the flatbed scanner, rather than the ADF, to scan.
●Use quality originals.
●Load the media correctly. If the media is loaded incorrectly, it might skew, causing unclear
images and problems with the OCR application. See Installing and loading the media input
trays for instructions.
●Open or close the straight-through output door on the product to accommodate the copy job. If
you are copying to standard weight media, use the output bin (door closed). If you are copying
to heavy media, use the straight-through output path (door open).
●Adjust the software settings according to how you plan to use the scanned page. See
Enhancing images with HP LaserJet Document Manager or HP Photo Center and Scanner
resolution and color for more information.
●If your product frequently feeds more than one page at a time, replace the separation pad. For
more information, see Changing the printer separation pad.
●Recurring feed problems indicate that the copier/separation pad is worn. See Ordering
HP parts and accessories to order a new separation pad. See Changing the printer separation
pad for more information about replacing the separation pad.
●Use or make a carrier sheet to protect your originals.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
180 14 Troubleshooting scanning problems EN
Identifying and correcting scan defects
Blank pages
●The original might have been loaded upside down. In the ADF, put the top end of the original
media stack into the ADF input tray, with the media stack face up and the first page to be
scanned on top of the stack. See Loading originals to copy or scan for instructions.
●If you are getting blank pages when scanning from the flatbed, make sure the original
document is loaded correctly. Place the original document face down on the flatbed scanner
with the top left corner of the document located in the lower right corner of the glass.
Too light or dark
●Try adjusting the settings.
•Make sure you have the correct resolution and color settings. See Scanner resolution and
color for more information.
●You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Unwanted lines
●Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner. Try cleaning the
flatbed scanner surface. See Cleaning the outside of the product for instructions.
Black dots or streaks
●Ink, glue, correction fluid, or an unwanted substance might be on the scanner surface. Try
cleaning the flatbed scanner surface. See Cleaning the outside of the product for instructions.
Unclear text
●Try adjusting the settings.
•Make sure you have the correct resolution and color settings. See Scanner resolution and
color for more information.
●You might need to change the properties settings for the associated function in HP LaserJet
Director or HP LaserJet Document Manager. See the product software Help for details.
Reduced size
●The HP software settings might be set to reduce the scanned image. See the product software
Help for more information about changing the settings in HP LaserJet Director and HP
LaserJet Document Manager.
EN 181
15 Troubleshooting faxing problems
Use the topics in this chapter to troubleshoot common fax problems. These apply only to the
LaserJet 3330 product.
●Fax phone problems
●The document stops feeding during faxing
●The product is receiving faxes but not sending them
●Outgoing fax calls keep dialing
●Faxes you send are not arriving
●All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed
●Unable to start receiving faxes from an extension phone
●Voice calls are not being received by the phone or answering machine connected to the line
●Incoming fax calls are not being answered
●Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly
●Faxes are not printing or are printing incorrectly
●Faxes are printing on two pages instead of one
●Received faxes are too light or are printing only on half of the page
●Fax activity logs or call reports are not printing correctly
●The volume is too high or low
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
182 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems EN
Fax phone problems
Use the following checklist to help you define what is causing any faxing problems you might be
encountering.
Are you using the phone cord supplied with the product?
This product has been tested with the supplied phone cord to meet RJ11 specifications.
Is the fax/phone line connector installed in the correct socket on the
product?
It should be plugged into the product’s line socket (the socket on top with an “L” next to it). You
must open the left side panel to access the socket. See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in
the fax guide that came with your product for details.
Is the fax/phone line connector seated into the socket on the product?
Gently pull on the Fax/Phone line connector to make sure it is well seated into the socket.
Is the phone wall jack working properly?
Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack.
Can you hear a dial tone and can you make a phone call?
Attach a phone to the wall jack and verify that there is a dial tone and that you can make a phone
call.
What type of phone line are you using?
Dedicated line: A unique fax/phone number assigned to receive or send faxes. The phone cord
should be connected to the top port inside the left side panel of the product (the one that is not
labeled with a telephone icon).
Shared phone line: A system where both phone calls and faxes are received or sent using the
same phone number and phone line. A single standard phone line can only perform one function
at a time. You cannot send a fax while talking on the phone or while connecting to the Internet
using the same phone line.
PBX system: A business environment phone system. Standard home phones and the HP
LaserJet 3330 use an analog phone signal. PBX systems are digital and are incompatible with
standard phones and with devices such as the HP LaserJet 3330. You need to have access to a
standard analog phone line in order to send and receive faxes.
Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where, when one incoming line is busy, the next call
“rolls over” to the next available line. Try attaching the product to the first incoming phone line. The
product will answer the phone after it rings the number of times set in the product’s
rings-to-answer setting. (See Changing rings-to-answer.)
Distinctive ring service: The phone company can assign two phone numbers to one physical
line and assign each number a distinctive ring pattern. Make sure the product is set to respond to
the correct distinctive ring pattern assigned to the fax phone number by your phone service
provider. (See Changing answer ring patterns.)
EN The document stops feeding during faxing 183
Are you using a phone line splitter?
A phone line splitter is a device used to split out two or more phone line jacks to connect phones or
devices to the same phone line wall jack. Confusion can result from the existence of two different
kinds of splitters.
Parallel splitters (also called “T” splitters) split a single line into two jacks, allowing two devices to
be plugged into the same line.
Line1/Line2 splitters provide two phone line outlets from a single jack with two unique phone
numbers (two phone lines are connected to a single wall jack). A Line1/Line2 splitter must be used
if you have a fax line and a voice line coming into the same wall jack.
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with your product for
instructions.
Note Parallel or “T” splitters should not be used with the product, as they can degrade the quality of the
phone signal. If you need to attach a second device to the phone line along with the product, plug
the second device into the product’s “phone” socket (the socket on the bottom) inside the product’s
left side panel. See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with your
product for instructions.
Are you using a surge protection device?
This is a device used between the wall jack and the product to protect the product against
electrical power passed through the phone lines. These can cause some fax communication
problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal. If you are having problems sending or
receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the product directly to the phone jack
on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge protection device.
Are you using a phone company’s voice messaging service?
This is a voice messaging service used to replace telephone answering devices. If the messaging
service’s rings-to-answer setting is lower than the product’s rings-to-answer setting, the
messaging service answers the call and the product is not able to receive faxes. If the product’s
rings-to-answer setting is lower than that of the messaging service, the product will answer all calls
and no call will ever be routed to the messaging service. The only voice messaging solution that
can be successfully used with the product is a stand-alone telephone answering machine.
Are you using an answering machine?
An answering machine should be connected directly to the port located inside the left side panel of
the product that is labeled with the telephone icon or should be shared on the same phone line
extension. Set the product’s rings-to-answer for one ring more than the number of rings for which
the answering machine is set. See Changing rings-to-answer for more information.
Note If an answering machine is connected on the same phone line but on a different jack, it may interfere
with the product’s ability to receive faxes.
The document stops feeding during faxing
Is the document too large or too small for the ADF?
The maximum length of a page you can load is 381 mm (15 inches). Faxing of a longer page stops
at 381 mm (15 inches). The minimum page size for the ADF is 127 by 127 mm (5 by 5 inches). If
the item is too small, it can jam inside the ADF.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
184 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems EN
If there is no jam and it has been less than one minute, wait a moment before pressing cancel. If
there is a jam, see Clearing media jams, and resend the job.
Are there problems with the fax machine you are sending to?
Try sending to a different fax machine.
Are there problems with the phone line?
Do one of the following:
●Turn up the volume on the product and press fax/send on the control panel. If you hear a dial
tone, the phone line is working.
●Disconnect the product from the phone jack and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to
make sure the phone line is working.
The product is receiving faxes but not sending them
Is your product on a PBX system?
If your product is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone the product
cannot detect.
Disable the detect dial tone setting. See Changing the detect dial tone setting.
Is there a poor phone connection?
If you think there might be a poor connection on this phone line, try sending the fax later and see if
it sends successfully.
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing
The product will automatically redial a fax number if the redial on busy option is set to on. To stop
the redials while the product is dialing, press cancel. See the Changing redial settings if you need
to change the setting.
Faxes you send are not arriving
Is the receiving fax machine off or does it have an error
condition?
Call the recipient to make sure the fax machine is on and ready to receive faxes.
Is the fax still waiting in memory?
A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, there are other jobs ahead
of it waiting to be sent, or the fax is set up for a delayed send. If a fax job is in memory for any of
these reasons, an entry for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log (see Printing the
fax activity log) and check the Status column for jobs with a Pending designation.
EN All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed 185
All of the numbers in a long fax number cannot be dialed
The maximum number of digits or characters that can be entered into a fax number is 50. Try
dialing the fax number in manual mode. See Using manual dial.
Unable to start receiving faxes from an extension phone
Is the extension phone setting disabled?
See Enabling an extension phone for instructions about changing this setting.
Is the telephone cord securely connected?
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected between the phone and the product (or other
device connected to the product).
Press 1-2-3 in sequence, wait for three seconds, then hang up.
Voice calls are not being received by the phone or answering
machine connected to the line
Is the phone cord connected properly?
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with the product to check
the installation. The product must be the first device connected to the phone line.
Are the answer mode and rings-to-answer settings set properly?
See Setting the answer mode or Changing rings-to-answer to determine which settings you need.
The rings-to-answer must be set higher than for the answering machine.
Is the answering machine or phone functioning?
Connect the phone or answering machine directly to the phone line and determine whether it
works by itself.
Incoming fax calls are not being answered
Is the answer mode set to manual?
If the answer mode is set to manual, the product never answers calls. You have to answer the
phone and start receiving the fax yourself. See Setting the answer mode for more information.
Is the rings-to-answer setting set correctly?
Check the rings-to-answer setting for your configuration. See Changing rings-to-answer or refer to
the fax guide that came with the product to determine which setting you need.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
186 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems EN
Is the answer ring pattern feature turned on?
If the answer ring pattern is turned on but you do not have the service, or you do have the service
and the feature is not set correctly, this will interfere with receiving faxes. Check the answer ring
pattern feature to make sure it is set properly. See Changing answer ring patterns.
Is the phone cord connected properly?
See “Connecting the product to a phone line” in the fax guide that came with the product to check
the installation. Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the product.
Is there a voice message being played by an answering
machine?
An answering machine voice message can interfere with the product’s ability to receive faxes.
Re-record your answering machine message, leaving at least two seconds of silence at the
beginning of the message.
Are there too many devices connected to the phone line?
Try removing the last device connected and determine whether the product works. If not, continue
removing devices one at a time and retry after removing each one.
Is the phone line working?
Do one of the following:
●Turn up the volume on the product and press fax/send on the control panel. If you hear a dial
tone, the phone line is working.
●Disconnect the product from the phone jack and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to
make sure the phone line is working.
Is a voice messaging service interfering with the product
answering calls?
Do one of the following:
●Discontinue the messaging service.
●Get a phone line dedicated to fax calls.
●Set the product to answer in manual mode. In manual mode, you must start the fax receive
process yourself.
●Leave the product set to automatic mode and lower the rings-to-answer for the product to a
number less than the rings-to-answer for the voice mail (see Changing rings-to-answer). The
product will answer all incoming calls.
Is the product out of paper?
If the product is out of paper and its memory is full it will not be able to receive faxes. Refill the
media input tray. The product will print all of the faxes it has saved in memory and will then resume
answering fax calls.
EN Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly 187
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly
Are you sending or receiving a very complex fax?
A complex fax, such as one with many graphics, takes longer to be sent or received.
Does the receiving fax machine have a slow modem speed?
The product only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use.
Is the resolution at which the fax was sent or received very high?
A higher resolution typically results in better quality, but also requires a longer transmission time. If
you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to lower the resolution and resend the fax.
If you are sending, lower the resolution and resend the fax. See Changing the default resolution to
change the default setting.
Is there a poor phone line connection?
If there is a poor phone line connection, the product and the receiving fax machine slow down the
transmission to adjust for errors. Hang up and resend the fax. If this does not work, have the
phone company check the phone line.
Faxes are not printing or are printing incorrectly
Is there media in the media input tray?
If there is no media, load the media input tray. Any faxes received while the input tray is empty are
stored in memory and will print once the tray has been refilled.
Is the receive to PC option selected?
If the receive to PC option is selected, faxes are being received by the computer. See Receiving
faxes to your computer for information on this setting.
Faxes are printing on two pages instead of one
Is the autoreduction setting set correctly?
If you want faxes to be reduced to fit on one page, the autoreduction setting should be on. If the
setting is off, faxes may print on multiple pages. See Changing autoreduction settings for incoming
faxes to adjust the setting.
Received faxes are too light or are printing only on half of the page
Did the product run out of toner while printing a fax?
The product stores up to 10 of the most recently printed faxes. As soon as possible, replace the
print cartridge and see To reprint a fax.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
188 15 Troubleshooting faxing problems EN
Fax activity logs or call reports are not printing correctly
Are the activity log and call report settings correct?
Print a configuration page (see Printing a configuration page) and check when the reports print.
See Setting fax call report print times and Setting the fax activity log to print automatically to
change the settings.
The volume is too high or low
Do the volume settings need to be adjusted?
See Using the product’s volume controls for instructions about changing volume settings.
EN 189
16 Troubleshooting network
problems
You can use the information in this chapter to troubleshoot general network problems. See the
following sections for more information:
●Troubleshooting overview
●Configuration page does not print
●Error messages
●Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold reset)
●Interpreting the configuration page
●Browse hp.com
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
190 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Troubleshooting overview
The questions below will help you troubleshoot your print server quickly. Just answer each
question in turn. Please answer the questions below in the order listed.
1Is your printer ON and READY?
•If Yes, continue with the next question.
2Is your print server’s USB OK? (USB light ON solid green?)
•If Yes, continue with the next question.
3Is your print server’s Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?)
•If Yes, continue with the next question.
4Is the 10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?)
•If Yes, continue with the next question.
5Can you print a Jetdirect configuration page?
ON and READY
The first step in troubleshooting your print server is to make sure that the attached printer is ready
to receive a print job from the print server. To do this, check the printer’s lights or control panel to
see whether it is ON and READY.
If your printer’s power is switched on and the printer is ready to print, continue with USB OK? (USB
light ON solid green?).
If the printer is not ready to print, or if you are not sure what to look for, see the next topic.
Is your printer ON and READY?
Check the following items to make sure that your printer is online and ready to print.
●Is the printer plugged in and switched on? Make sure that the printer is plugged in and
switched on. The control panel display should not be blank. If you have checked these items
and the printer still shows no sign of being on, you may have a defective power cable, power
source, or printer.
●Is the printer ready? The display should say Ready. If it does not, check to see that there are
no paper jams in the print or scan paper paths. See Clearing media jams for instructions.
●Make sure all the doors are securely closed.
●If the printer display still does not say Ready, try pressing the menu/enter button.
●Try printing a configuration page. See Printing a configuration page. If you are not able to print
a configuration page, you will not be able to print from your print server.
After looking through the list above and making any necessary changes, is your printer ready
now?
USB OK? (USB light ON solid green?)
The HP Jetdirect 310x print server connects to its printer using a USB cable. If the USB
connection is working correctly, the USB light on the print server will be ON solid green (bright
green in color and glowing continuously, not blinking). If the USB connection is not working
correctly, the USB light may be off, blinking green, or blinking amber.
If your print server’s USB light is ON solid green, continue with Power/Status OK? (Power/Status
light ON solid green?).
EN Troubleshooting overview 191
If your print server’s USB light is not ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to look for,
continue with the following troubleshooting topics.
Note that the Jetdirect 310x print server does not support parallel-to-USB converters (for
connecting a parallel printer to a USB host)—it works with USB printers only. Make sure that the
cable is connected firmly to both the printer and the print server.
Check that both the printer and the print server are powered on.
After checking the items above and making any necessary changes, is the USB light now ON solid
green?
What is the state of the USB light?
The behavior of the USB light indicates the status of the USB connection. If the USB light on your
print server is not ON solid green, find the appropriate topic below to continue troubleshooting.
Is the USB light ON solid green?
Check the USB light on your print server. It should be ON solid green (bright green in color and
glowing continuously, not blinking). If it is not ON solid green, follow the troubleshooting steps
below.
Make sure that you have a USB cable connected between your printer and the USB port on the
print server. It should be a standard USB A-to-B cable, as shown below:
USB light OFF
If the USB light is OFF, it means that the print server’s USB connection is not operational. This is
OK before the print server finishes starting up (whether or not a USB cable is attached). If the light
remains OFF after startup, then the print server may be faulty.
Restart the print server by detaching the power cable and re-attaching it. Wait for the Power/Status
light to stop blinking (when the self-test finishes).
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
If yes, continue with Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?).
If no, your print server has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support;
see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
USB light blinking green
If the USB light is blinking green, it indicates that the print server has detected a good connection
to a valid USB device, but the print server does not support the device. For example, this would
happen if you connected a USB digital camera to the print server.
This is not a fault, but rather an incompatibility between the print server and the connected device.
The HP Jetdirect 310x print server supports only USB printers (including USB multifunction
printers and All-in-One devices). It does not support non-printer USB devices, nor does it support
USB cable extenders, USB-to-parallel converters, or USB hubs.
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
If yes, continue with Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
192 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
If no, but you are connected to a USB printer, your print server has a problem that requires
assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer that came with your product
for information on contacting HP.
USB light blinking amber
If the USB light is blinking amber, there might be a hardware fault (for example, a short-circuit,
faulty cable, or a printer drawing too much power).
To verify, disconnect the USB cable at the print server. Switch on the printer if it is off. Power cycle
the print server (unplug it and plug it back in). Then reconnect the USB cable. If the USB light is
now green and steady, then no problem remains.
Otherwise, if the USB light is still blinking amber, there may be a faulty component. Try these steps
to determine which component might be causing the problem:
●Detach the USB cable and power cycle the print server (unplug it and plug it back in). If the
USB LED is green and steady, the print server is OK. If it is blinking amber, the print server is
faulty.
●Try reconnecting the USB cable to the print server only, and power cycle the print server
(unplug it and plug it back in). If the USB LED is green and steady, the cable is also OK. If it is
blinking amber, the cable may be faulty.
●Power cycle the printer and reconnect the USB cable to the printer. If the USB LED is green
and steady, the printer is also OK. If it is blinking amber, the printer may be faulty.
Is the USB light now ON solid green?
If yes, continue with Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?).
If no, you may need to replace the component indicated at fault. If the fault is with the print server
or the USB cable (provided with the print server), get assistance from HP Jetdirect technical
support; see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status OK? (Power/Status light ON solid green?)
The Power/Status light provides information on the state of the print server’s power connection
and on its physical connection to the network. If connections are working correctly, the
Power/Status light should be ON solid green (bright green in color and glowing continuously, not
blinking). If the connections are not working correctly, the Power/Status light may be off, blinking
green, or blinking amber.
If your print server’s Power/Status light is ON solid green, continue with 10/100 link OK? (10 light
or 100 light ON solid green?).
If your print server’s Power/Status light is not ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to look for,
read the topics below to start evaluating the status of the print server.
Is the Power/Status light ON solid green?
Check the Power/Status light on your print server. It should be ON solid green (bright green in
color and glowing continuously, not blinking). If it is not ON solid green, please follow the
troubleshooting steps below.
For all of the steps below, note that when you first apply power to a normally operating print server,
the Power/Status light will slowly blink green for several seconds during self-test, and then go ON
solid green when the unit is ready for operation.
Note Check that the Jetdirect power module is plugged into a suitable power source (typically a wall outlet),
and that the power connector is plugged into the print server.
EN Troubleshooting overview 193
If necessary, try plugging the power module into a different power source.
Try a different power module/cable if one is available.
After checking the items above and making any necessary changes, is the Power/Status light now
ON solid green?
What is the state of the Power/Status light?
The behavior of the Power/Status light indicates the status of the print server’s power connection
and its physical connection to the network. If the Power/Status light on your print server is not ON
solid green, find its state in the list below and continue troubleshooting.
Power/Status light OFF
If the Power/Status light is OFF, your power module may be faulty. Fixing this fault requires
assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer that came with the product
for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status light blinking green
The Power/Status light should be ON solid green to indicate that print server power is OK and that
the network cable is connected properly to the print server. If the Power/Status light is blinking
green, please try the steps below and make changes as necessary.
Make sure that the network cable is connected securely to the print server.
Check that the network cable is plugged securely into the hub/switch/router, and that the
connection is set to the correct network speed.
●Check that the LINK light is ON for the port on the hub/switch/router to which the print server is
connected.
●Your network cable may be faulty. Try a different cable.
●If the light still does not come on, try a different port on the hub/switch/router.
Is the Power/Status light now ON solid green?
If yes, continue with 10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?). If no, your print server
has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support; see the support flyer
that came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Power/Status light blinking amber
Your print server has developed a fault. Fixing this fault requires assistance from HP Jetdirect
technical support; see the support flyer that came with your product for information on contacting
HP.
10/100 link OK? (10 light or 100 light ON solid green?)
The link lights, the 10 light and the 100 light, indicate whether the print server can initiate a
network link at the right speed with your hub, switch, or router. One of the link lights, either the 10
light or the 100 light, should be ON solid green (bright green in color and glowing continuously, not
blinking) to indicate a valid link with the hub/switch/router. If there is not a valid link, both the 10
and 100 lights will be off.
If one of the print server’s link lights is ON solid green, continue with Check the print server’s
I/O status.
If neither of the print server’s link lights is ON solid green, or if you are not sure what to
look for, follow the instructions below to start evaluating the link status of the print server.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
194 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Is one of the link lights ON (solid green)?
Check the link lights on your print server; these lights are built into the network connector. One of
the link lights, either the 10 light or the 100 light, but not both, should be ON solid green, to indicate
a valid network connection.
Link lights OFF
Try the steps below and make any necessary corrections.
●Make sure that the network cable is connected securely to the print server.
●Check that the network cable is plugged securely into the hub/switch/router, and that the
connection is set to the correct network speed. (If your hub/switch/router is set to configure its
link speed automatically, try to configure it manually for 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps only. After
changing this setting, you may need to cycle power to the print server—unplug the print
server’s power cable and then plug it in again.)
●Check that the LINK light is ON for the port on the hub/switch/router to which the print server is
connected.
●Your network cable may be faulty. Try a different cable.
●If the light still does not come on, try a different port on the hub/switch/router.
Did these steps turn ON one of the link lights?
If yes, continue with Check the print server’s I/O status.
If no, your print server has a problem that requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support;
see the support flyer that came with your product for a list of technical support telephone numbers.
Check the print server’s I/O status
Check the I/O status of the print server by following these steps:
●Print a Jetdirect configuration page. To print the page, press the test button on the print server.
●If the configuration page does not print, see Configuration page does not print for help in
getting it to print.
●On the configuration page, check that the print server reports its status as “I/O Card Ready.”
The Status entry is the first entry in the General Information section, in the upper left portion of
the page. See Interpreting the configuration page for more details on the configuration page.
If your configuration page shows a status of “I/O Card Not Ready,” continue with Error messages.
Can you print a Jetdirect configuration page?
To print a configuration page, press the test button on the print server.
A configuration page should print on the connected printer. This page displays information about
the print server hardware, the firmware version, the hardware (MAC) address, the connected
printer, network connectivity, network traffic, and network protocols. See Interpreting the
configuration page for details on the configuration page contents.
If the configuration page does not print, see Configuration page does not print.
Configuration page prints?
The Jetdirect configuration page is a page that the print server sends to the attached printer, both
as a test of the connection between the print server and the printer, and as a display of the status
of the print server’s functions. See Interpreting the configuration page for details on the
configuration page contents.
EN Configuration page does not print 195
If you are able to print a Jetdirect configuration page on your printer, continue with the instructions
in Check the print server’s I/O status.
Configuration page does not print
If the configuration page does not print, try these steps:
1Make sure your printer is connected to your print server by a USB A-to-B cable. (This is the
standard USB cable.)
Note Note that the HP Jetdirect 310x print server does not support parallel-to-USB converters (for
connecting a parallel printer to a USB host)—it works with USB printers only. Make sure that the
cable is connected firmly to both the printer and the print server.
2Make sure that the printer and the print server are powered on.
3Make sure that the printer is Ready.
4You can check whether the print server is sending the page in a printer language (PDL) that
the printer supports. If the language is not supported by the printer, the page will not print or
will be unreadable if it does print.
By default, the print server is configured to determine the appropriate printer language
automatically. It is possible that the print server is not able to determine automatically which
language it should use for your printer.
You can cycle through the four printer languages using the following procedure:
aPress and hold the print server’s Test button. After about three seconds, the power/status
LED changes to amber. Continue to hold the button until the power/status LED is flashing
green. Then release the button.
bBriefly press and release the test button once again to request the configuration page in
the next language.
cVerify that a readable page is printed. Repeat these steps up to four times if necessary to
receive a configuration page you can read.
5If you cannot read the page, refer to your printer documentation to find out which of the
following four printer languages are supported by your printer:
•ASCII
•PCL
•PostScript
•HP/GL-2
6It may be necessary to re-initialize the connection between the printer and the print server by
cycling power on the print server. (Unplug the power cable from the print server; then plug it
back in.) Do this with the printer switched ON.
Error messages
If your configuration page shows a status of “I/O Card Not Ready,” you will see a specific error
message just below the status line. This error message indicates what is preventing the print
server from functioning correctly.
From the list below, find the error message that you see on the configuration page. The
instructions in the next few topics give a fuller explanation of each error.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
196 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
●03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
●08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL
●11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS
●12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT
●Other Error: If the error that you see on the configuration page is not listed above, your
problem requires assistance from HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
03 LAN Error: EXTERNAL LOOPBACK
The print server is incorrectly connected to the network or is defective.
Make sure that your print server is correctly attached to your network. In addition, check all other
cabling and connectors.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
08 LAN Error: INFINITE DEFERRAL
There is a network congestion problem.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
11 LAN Error: RETRY FAULTS
There is a problem with your network cabling or with your external network configuration.
Verify that your hub/switch/router port is operating correctly.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
12 LAN Error: NO LINKBEAT
When the print server is connected to a 10/100 Base-Tx port, this message is displayed if the Link
Beat signal is not sensed.
Check the network cable, and verify that the hub/switch/router is providing Link Beat.
For help in correcting this error, contact HP Jetdirect technical support. See the support flyer that
came with your product for information on contacting HP.
Resetting the 310x print server to factory defaults (cold reset)
Once you configure the print server, the configuration settings are retained in memory unless you
manually reset them to factory defaults.
To reset the HP Jetdirect 310x print server configuration to factory defaults, follow these steps:
1Unplug the power cable from the back of the print server.
2While holding down the test button on the rear end of the print server, plug the power cable
back into the print server and continue to hold down the test button for about five seconds. Any
user-configured settings will be erased.
EN Interpreting the configuration page 197
Interpreting the configuration page
The configuration page (also called a self-test page or configuration plot) for a print server displays
messages, network statistics, and status for the print server. To print a configuration page, briefly
press the test button on the print server.
An HP Jetdirect configuration page can also be viewed over the network from a management
utility (such as HP Web JetAdmin), or by accessing the embedded web server on the print server.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
198 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
General information
Provides general print server status and identification information.
Message Description
Status Current state of the print server.
●I/O Card Ready the print server has successfully connected to the
network and is awaiting data.
●I/O Card Initializing the print server is initializing the network
protocols. For more information, see the status line for each protocol on
the configuration page.
●I/O Card Not Ready there is a problem with the print server or its
configuration.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Model Number The model number of the HP print server (for example, J6038A).
Hardware Address The 12-digit hexadecimal LAN hardware (MAC) address of the print server
installed in or attached to the printing device. This address is assigned by
the manufacturer.
Firmware Version The firmware revision number of the print server currently installed in the
printer. The format is X.NN.NN, where X is a letter that depends on the print
server model.
Port Select Specifies the LAN port on the print server that has been detected for use:
●None the print server is not connected to the network.
●RJ-45 the RJ-45 network port is connected.
Port Config Identifies the link configuration of the RJ-45 LAN port on the print server:
●10BASE-T HALF 10 Mbps, half-duplex.
●10BASE-T FULL 10 Mbps, full-duplex.
●100TX HALF 100 Mbps, half-duplex.
●100TX FULL 100 Mbps, full-duplex.
●Unknown the print server is in an initialization state.
●Disconnected a network connection has not been detected. Check
network cables.
Auto Negotiation Identifies whether IEEE 802.3u Autonegotiation on the 10/100Tx port is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
On: the print server will attempt to automatically configure itself onto the
network at the proper speed (10 or 100 Mbps) and mode (half or full
duplex).
Manufacturing ID The manufacturing identification code for use by HP Customer Care
personnel.
Date Manufactured Identifies the date of manufacture of the HP Jetdirect print server.
manuals4you.com
EN Interpreting the configuration page 199
USB port information
Provides the USB printer class descriptors for the device connected to the port.
Network statistics
Provides the current values for various network parameters monitored by the print server.
SNMP Set Cmty Name Specifies whether an SNMP set community name has been configured on
the print server. An SNMP set community name is a password for “write”
access to SNMP control functions (SNMP SetRequests) on the print server.
●Not Specified an SNMP set community name has not been set.
●Specified a specific SNMP set community name has been set.
USB Printer 1 Heads the section for the USB printer class descriptor information supplied
by the manufacturer of the printing device. The configuration and diagnostic
pages will be printed on the printing device attached to the print server.
Message Description
Device Name Name of the attached USB printing device, supplied by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the attached printing device.
Serial Number Serial number of the attached printing device.
Communication Mode Current USB communication mode:
●1284.4 IEEE standard protocol, a mode for printers and multifunction
(All-in-One) devices that allows multiple channels of simultaneous print,
scan, and status communication.
●MLC HP-proprietary protocol for Multiple Logical Channels, a mode for
printers and multifunction (All-in-One) devices that allows multiple
channels of simultaneous print, scan, and status communication.
●Bidirectional two-way printer communication, sending print data
to the printing device and returning status information from the printing
device.
●Unidirectional one-way printer communication from computer to
printing device.
●Device not found connection of a printing device has not been
detected. Check device and cable.
●Device not supported the device connected is not a printer (for
example, a camera).
Message Description
Total Packets Received Total number of frames (packets) received by the print server without error.
This includes broadcast, multicast packets, and packets specifically
addressed to the print server. This number does not include packets
specifically addressed to other nodes.
Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
200 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
TCP/IP protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the TCP/IP network protocols.
Unicast Packets
Received
Number of frames specifically addressed to this print server. This does not
include broadcasts or multicasts.
Bad Packets Received Total number of frames (packets) received with errors by the print server.
Framing Errors
Received
Maximum of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) errors and framing errors.
CRC errors are frames received with CRC errors. Framing errors are
frames received with alignment errors. A large number of framing errors
could indicate a cabling problem with your network.
Total Packets
Transmitted
Total number of frames (packets) transmitted without error.
Unsendable Packets Total number of frames (packets) not successfully transmitted because of
errors.
Transmit Collisions Number of frames not transmitted because of repeated collisions.
Transmit Late
Collisions
Total number of frames not transmitted because a late collision occurred. A
large number may indicate a cabling problem on the network.
Message Description
Status Current TCP status:
●Ready the print server is awaiting data over TCP/IP.
●Disabled TCP/IP was manually disabled.
●Initializing the print server is searching for the BOOTP server, or
trying to get the configuration file through TFTP. An additional status
message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Host Name The host name configured on the print server. It may be truncated.
●Not Specified no host name was specified in a BOOTP response
or TFTP configuration file.
●NPIxxxxxx the default name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx represents
the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
IP Address The Internet Protocol (IP) address assigned to the print server. This is a
required entry for its operation on a TCP/IP network. During initialization, a
temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. After two minutes, a default IP
address 192.0.0.192 is assigned, which may not be a valid IP address for
your network.
●Not Specified an IP address is not assigned or the value is zero.
Message Description
EN Interpreting the configuration page 201
Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask configured on the print server. During initialization, a
temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. Depending on configuration
parameters, the print server may automatically assign a usable default
value.
●Not Specified a subnet mask is not configured.
Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway used when sending packets off the local
network. Only one default gateway may be configured. During initialization,
a temporary value 0.0.0.0 is displayed. If not provided, the IP address of the
print server is used.
●Not Specified a default gateway is not configured.
Config By Identifies how the print server obtained its IP configuration.
●BOOTP automatic configuration via a BOOTP server.
●BOOTP/TFTP automatic configuration via a BOOTP server and TFTP
configuration file.
●DHCP automatic configuration via a DHCP server.
●DHCP/TFTP automatic configuration via a DHCP server and TFTP
configuration file.
●RARP automatic configuration via the Reverse Address Resolution
Protocol.
●User Specified manual configuration via Telnet, the printer’s
control panel, HP Web JetAdmin, embedded web server, or other
method.
●Default IP the default IP address was assigned. This address may
not be a valid address for your network.
●Not Configured the print server was not configured with IP
parameters. Verify that TCP/IP is enabled, or check for error status.
BOOTP Server
or
DHCP Server
or
RARP Server
Displayed if BOOTP, DHCP, or RARP is used for TCP/IP configuration. It
specifies the IP address of the system that responds to the print server’s
request for automatic TCP/IP configuration over the network.
●Not Specified the configuration server’s IP address could not be
determined or was set to zero in the response packet.
BOOTP/DHCP Server Displayed during initialization while the print server attempts to obtain its
TCP/IP configuration from a BOOTP or DHCP server. The temporary
address displayed is 0.0.0.0.
●Not Specified the configuration server’s IP address could not be
determined or was set to zero in the response packet.
TFTP Server The IP address of the system where the TFTP configuration file is located.
During initialization, the temporary address 0.0.0.0 is displayed.
●Not Specified a TFTP server has not been set.
Config File The name of the print server's configuration file. The file pathname may be
truncated to fit on two lines.
●Not Specified a file was not specified in the BOOTP reply from the
host.
Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
202 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Domain Name The Domain Name System (DNS) name of the domain in which the print
server resides (for example, support.company.com). It is not the fully
qualified DNS name because the host printer name is not included (for
example: printer1.support.company.com).
●Not Specified a domain name has not been configured on the
print server.
DNS Server The IP address of the Domain Name System (DNS) server.
●Not Specified a DNS server's IP address has not been configured
on the print server.
WINS Server The IP address of the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server.
●Not Specified a WINS server's IP address has not been
configured on the print server.
Syslog Server The IP address of the syslog server configured on the print server.
●Not Specified a syslog server has not been configured.
Idle Timeout The timeout value expressed in seconds after which the print server closes
an idle TCP print data connection. Acceptable values are integers between
0 and 3600 seconds. A value of zero turns off the timeout mechanism. The
default value is 270 seconds.
SLP Specifies whether the print server sends Service Location Protocol (SLP)
packets used by system applications for automated installation.
●Enabled the print server sends SLP packets.
●Disabled the print server does not send SLP packets.
Access List Identifies whether a host access control list is configured on the print
server. A host access control list specifies the IP address of individual
systems, or IP network of systems, that are allowed access to the print
server and device.
●Specified a host access list is configured on the print server.
●Not Specified a host access list is not configured on the print
server. All systems are allowed access.
Web JetAdmin URL If the print server is found on the network by HP Web JetAdmin, the URL of
the host system used for HP Web JetAdmin services is displayed. The URL
is limited to two lines and may be truncated.
●Not Specified the URL of the HP Web JetAdmin host system could
not be identified or is not configured.
Message Description
EN Interpreting the configuration page 203
IPX/SPX protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the IPX/SPX network protocols.
Message Description
Status Indicates the current IPX/SPX protocol status.
●Ready the print server is awaiting data over IPX/SPX.
●Disabled IPX/SPX was manually disabled.
●Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Primary Frame Type Specifies the frame type selection on the print server.
●Auto Select the print server automatically senses and limits the
frame type to the first one detected.
●EN_II limits the frame type to IPX over Ethernet frames. All others will
be counted and discarded.
●EN_802.2 limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.2 with IEEE
802.3 frames. All others will be counted and discarded.
●EN_SNAP limits the frame type to IPX over SNAP with IEEE 802.3
frames. All others will be counted and discarded.
●EN_802.3 limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.3 frames. All
others will be counted and discarded.
Network The first column headed Network indicates the network number associated
with each protocol frame type used for communication between a server
and the print server.
●Unknown the print server is still trying to determine which network
number to use.
Frame Type
EN_II
EN_802.2
EN_SNAP
EN_802.3
The second column headed Frame Type identifies the frame type
associated with each network number.
Unless a specific frame type has been manually configured, the print server
automatically determines the protocol frame type by listening to the network
data being transferred over the network.
●Disabled a specific frame type for that network has been manually
configured.
Rcvd The third column headed Rcvd indicates how many packets have been
received for each frame type.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
204 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Novell/NetWare protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the Novell NetWare network protocol.
Message Description
Status Indicates the current NetWare configuration status.
●Ready the print server is awaiting data.
●Disabled IPX/SPX was manually disabled.
●Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Node Name In Queue Server Mode (see below), this is the IPX/SPX name of the print
server. It must match a valid print server on the appropriate NetWare file
server. The default name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of
the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
In Remote Printer Mode (see below), this is the name specified when you
configured the networked printer. The default name is NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.
NetWare Mode The NetWare mode used by the print server:
●Queue Server indicates that the print server receives data directly
from the queue. It is also used when the printer is not configured.
●Remote Printer with the printer number following it, indicates that
the print server emulates a Novell NetWare remote printer.
NDS Tree Name Displays the name of the Novell Directory Services (NDS) tree for this
printer. NDS is a database of objects on a NetWare network, organized in a
heierarchical tree structure.
●Not Specified or missing: NDS is disabled.
NDS Context: Displays the fully qualified NDS name where the print server object resides
in the NDS tree. For example:
CN=lj_pserver.OU=support.OU=mycity.OU=mycompany
●Not Specified or missing: NDS is disabled.
Attached Server Identifies the Jetdirect discovery method NSG (Nearest Service Query) or
GSQ (General Service Query) and the name of the proxy file server used to
locate the configured bindery servers.
●Not Specified or missing: A NetWare server has not been
configured.
Queue Poll Interval This job poll interval specifies the time interval (in seconds) that the print
server waits to check for print jobs in a print queue. The default is two
seconds.
SAP Interval Specifies the time interval (in seconds) that the print server waits between
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) broadcasts on the network. The default
is 60 seconds.
Server x x identifies a NetWare file server to which the print server is attached.
EN Interpreting the configuration page 205
AppleTalk protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the AppleTalk network protocol.
DLC/LLC protocol information
Provides the current status and parameter values for the DLC/LLC network protocol.
Message Description
Status Indicates the current AppleTalk configuration status.
●Ready the print server is awaiting data.
●Disabled AppleTalk was manually disabled.
●Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
Name The name of the printer on the AppleTalk network. A number after the name
indicates that there are multiple devices with this name, and this is the Nth
instance of the name.
Zone The name of the AppleTalk network zone on which the printer is located.
Type The type of the printer being advertised on the network. Two types can be
displayed.
Network Number The AppleTalk Network Number on which the print server is currently
operating.
Node Number The AppleTalk Node Number that the print server chose for itself as part of
its initialization sequence.
Note: The AppleTalk phase 2 (P2) parameter is preconfigured on the print
server.
Message Description
Status Indicates the current DLC/LLC configuration status.
●Ready the print server is awaiting data.
●Disabled DLC/LLC was manually disabled.
●Initializing the print server is registering the node address or
name. An additional status message may also be displayed.
An error code and message are displayed if the print server is not ready.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
206 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Error messages
Error Code and Message Description
02
LAN ERROR- INTERNAL
LOOPBACK
During self-test, the print server detected an internal loopback test error.
The print server may be faulty. If the error persists, replace the print server.
03
LAN ERROR- EXTERNAL
LOOPBACK
The print server is incorrectly connected to your network or is defective.
Make sure your print server is correctly attached to your network. In
addition, check the cabling and connectors.
07
LAN ERROR- CONTROLLER
CHIP
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
replace the print server.
08
LAN ERROR- INFINITE
DEFERRAL
There is a network congestion problem.
Note: If the print server is not connected to the network, this error cannot
occur.
09
LAN ERROR- BABBLE
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
replace the print server.
0A
LAN ERROR- NOSQE
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: turn the printer off, then on again. If the error persists,
replace the print server.
0C
LAN ERROR- RECEIVER
OFF
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
Check the cabling and connectors on your Ethernet network. If you cannot
find a problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test:
remove and re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the
error persists, there is a problem with the print server.
0D
LAN ERROR- TRANSMITTER
OFF
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
Check the cabling and connectors on your Ethernet network. If you cannot
find a problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test:
remove and re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the
error persists, there is a problem with the print server.
0E
LAN ERROR- LOSS OF
CARRIER
Check the network connections. If the connections are intact, run the
power-on self-test: remove and re-attach the power module connector on
the print server. If the error persists, replace the print server.
10
LAN ERROR- UNDERFLOW
There may be a problem with your network cabling or the print server.
Check the cabling and connectors on your network. If you cannot find a
problem with your network cabling, run the power-on self-test: remove and
re-attach the power module connector on the print server. If the error
persists, there is a problem with the print server.
11
LAN ERROR- RETRY
FAULTS
There is a problem with your network cabling or external network
configuration. Verify operation of the hub or switch port.
EN Interpreting the configuration page 207
12
LAN ERROR- NO LINKBEAT
With a 10/100Base-Tx port connected, Link Beat is not sensed. Check the
network cable, and verify that the concentrator or hub is providing Link
Beat.
13
NETWORK RECONFIG- MUST
REBOOT
Reset or power cycle the print server to enable the new configuration
values.
15
CONFIGURATION ERROR
The configuration information for the NetWare functions is not stored
correctly on the print server. Use the installation software, embedded web
server, or other tools to reconfigure the print server. If this error persists,
there may be a problem with the print server.
16
NOT CONFIGURED
The print server has not been configured for NetWare. Use the installation
software, embedded web server, or other tools to configure the print server
for NetWare networks.
17
UNABLE TO FIND SERVER
The print server was unable to find the NetWare print server (in Remote
Printer mode) or file server (in Queue Server mode). There was no
response to service queries for advertising print servers or file servers that
matched the configured print server or file server name.
Make sure that the print server or file server is running and that the print
server or file server name configured on the print server matches the actual
name used by the print server or file server. Also make sure that all cables
and routers are functioning correctly.
18
PASSWORD ERROR
The print server detected that the password for the NetWare print server
object is wrong. Use a NetWare utility (such as PCONSOLE) to erase the
password for the print server object. When the print server logs on again, it
sets a new password.
Note: When multiple file servers are configured, the error is only displayed
on the configuration page if none of the file servers are connected.
19
NO QUEUE ASSIGNED
The HP Jetdirect print server detected that the print server object has not
been assigned any queues to service. Assign queues to the print server
object using printer installation or NetWare utilities.
Note: When multiple file servers are configured, the error is only displayed
on the configuration page if none of the file servers was successfully
connected.
1A
PRINTER NUMBER NOT
DEFINED
A NetWare printer number for this printer has not been configured. Assign a
valid printer number to the print server. Use a NetWare utility (such as
PCONSOLE), the Jetdirect embedded web server, or another tool to assign
a printer number.
1B
PRINTER NUMBER IN USE
The NetWare printer number assigned to the printer is already in use by
another printer. Assign an unused printer number. This may also occur
when a printer is power cycled, in which case the error goes away after the
print server times out and detects the lost connection.
Error Code and Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
208 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
1C
PRINT SERVER NO
DEFINED
The file server does not have a print server object that corresponds to the
specified NetWare node name. Use printer installation software, a NetWare
utility (such as PCONSOLE), or another tool to create the print server
object.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
1D
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
Remote Printer mode error. The print server was unable to establish an
SPX connection with the NetWare print server. Make sure that the NetWare
print server is running and that all cables and routers are functioning
correctly.
1E
FAIL RESERVING PRINTER
NUM
The SPX connection to the print server was lost when the print server
attempted to reserve the printer number. This indicates a possible network
problem, or a problem with the print server. Make sure all cables and
routers are functioning correctly. Try restarting the print server.
1F
ERR NEGOTIATING BUFFER
SIZE
A failure was detected when selecting the buffer size to be used when
reading print data from the file server. This may indicate a network problem.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
20
UNABLE TO LOGIN
A failure was detected when the print server tried to log onto the file server.
This could be caused by the print server object not existing on the file
server, or by a security check that prevents the print server from logging in.
Make sure the file server name and print server object name are correct.
Use PCONSOLE to erase the password for the print server object. Create a
new print server object.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
21
UNABLE TO SET PASSWORD
A failure was detected when the print server tried to set the password for
the print server object. (Whenever the print server is able to log in without a
password, it sets the password automatically.) This indicates a networking
or security problem. Create a new print server object.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
22
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
Queue Server mode error. The print server could not establish an NCP
connection to the file server. Make sure that the correct file servers are
connected.
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
Error Code and Message Description
EN Interpreting the configuration page 209
23
UNABLE TO ATTACH TO
QUEUE
A failure was detected when the print server tried to attach to one of the
queues assigned to the print server object. This may be because no
servers are allowed to attach to this queue. There may also be a networking
or security problem. Use PCONSOLE to make sure that servers are
allowed to attach to the queue, to delete the print server object from the list
of queue servers if you want the print server to service other queues, or to
delete the queue and create a new one (the print server object must be
added to the list of queue servers).
Note: When the print server is configured for multiple file servers, the error
is only displayed on the configuration page if none of the file servers was
successfully connected.
24
PSERVER CLOSED
CONNECTION
The NetWare print server requested a termination of the connection with
the print server. No error exists or is indicated. Make sure the NetWare print
server is running, and restart it if necessary.
25
DISCONNECTING - SPX
TIMEOUT
The SPX connection to the print server was lost after the connection had
been made. This indicates a possible network problem, or a problem with
the print server. Make sure all cables and routers are functioning correctly.
Try restarting the print server.
26
UNKNOWN NCP RETURN
CODE
The print server encountered an unexpected fatal error after it had
successfully connected to the file server. A wide variety of failures could
produce this error message, including a downed file server or a network
router failure.
27
UNEXPECTED PSERVER
DATA RCVD
The print server sent some data when the print server had not given its
permission to do so. This indicates a possible print server problem, possibly
a software problem.
28
OUT OF BUFFERS
The print server was unable to allocate a buffer from its internal memory.
This indicates all buffers are busy due possibly to heavy broadcast traffic or
large amounts of network traffic directed to the print server.
29
UNABLE TO SENSE NET
NUMBER
The print server has been trying for more than three minutes to determine
the NetWare protocol used on the network. Make sure that any file servers
and routers are operating correctly. Make sure that the settings for NetWare
frame type and source routing are correct.
2A
NDS ERR: EXCEEDS MAX
SERVERS
More queues were assigned than the print server can handle. Remove one
or more print queues from the list to be serviced by Queue Server Mode.
2B
NDS ERR: UNABLE TO
LOGIN
Unable to log onto the NetWare directory tree. Make sure that the print
server object is defined in the directory at the correct context. Clear the
print server password using NWADMIN or similar NetWare tool.
2C
AUTHENTICATION ERROR
Unable to log onto the NetWare directory tree. Make sure that the print
server object is defined in the directory at the correct context.
Error Code and Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
210 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
2D
NDS ERR: CHANGE PSSWRD
FAILED
Cannot modify the print server password to the value expected by the print
server.
2E
NDS SERVER PUBLIC KEY
ERROR
Print Server Object Name mismatch. Unable to read the file server’s public
key. Verify object names, or contact the NDS administrator.
2F
NDS ERR: SRVR NAME
UNRESOLVD
The file server on the network cannot be located. The server may not be
running at this time or a communications problem may exist.
30
NDS PRINT SERVER NAME
ERROR
The print server object cannot be located in the specified NDS context.
31
NDS PS PRINTER LIST
ERROR
Cannot locate a list of printer objects that should be assigned to the print
server object.
32
NDS PRINTER OBJ NOTIFY
ERR
The list of notification objects assigned to the printer object cannot be
located.
33
NDS PRINT OBJ QUEUE
LIST ERR
The list of print queues assigned to the printer objects cannot be located.
34
NDS ERR: UNRESOLVD
PRNTR OBJ
The printer object cannot be located in the NDS directory.
35
NDS ERR: INVALID SRVR
VERS
The current version of the NetWare file server is not supported.
36
NDS ERR: NO PRINTER
OBJECTS
No printer objects are assigned to the print server object configured to this
print server.
37
NDS ERR: MAX PRINT
OBJECTS
Too many printer objects are assigned to the print server object. Using
NetWare utilities (such as NWADMIN), reduce the number of printer objects
assigned to the print server.
38
NDS ERR: NO QUEUE
OBJECTS
No print queue objects are assigned to the printer objects located in the
NDS directory.
39
NDS ERR: MAX QUEUE
OBJECTS
Too many print queue objects are assigned to the printer. Reduce the
number of queues assigned.
Error Code and Message Description
EN Interpreting the configuration page 211
3A
UND ERR: UNABLE TO FIND
TREE
The NDS tree cannot be located. The message may occur when the file
server is not running or when a network communications problem exists.
3B
NDS CONNECTION STATE
ERROR
The print server cannot change the NDS connection state. Check licenses
on the spooling server.
3C
NDS ERR: UNRESOLVED
QUEUE
The print queue object cannot be located in the specified NDS context.
3D
NDS ERR: CANNOT READ Q
HOST
Cannot locate the file server on the network. The server may not be running
at this time or a communications problem may exist.
3E
NDS PRNT SRVR PUBLIC
KEY ERR
Print Server Object Name mismatch. Unable to read the print server’s
public key. Verify object names. Verify that the object key assigned to the
print server is a print server object and not a printer or other object.
3F
UNABLE TO GET NDS SRVR
ADDR
The NDS server address cannot be located or accessed.
40
ARP DUPLICATE IP
ADDRESS
The ARP layer has detected another node on the network using the same
IP address as the print server. Extended error information below this
message shows the hardware address of the other node.
41
NOVRAM ERROR
The print server cannot read the contents of its NOVRAM. Cycle power on
the print server by unplugging is power cable and plugging it back in. If the
problem persists, perform a cold reset on the print server (while holding
down the test button on the back of the print server, plug the power module
back into the print server and continue to hold down the test button for
about five seconds. Any user-configured settings will be erased.) If the
problem still persists, call HP technical support for help. See the support
flyer that came with the product for information on contacting HP.
42
INVALID IP ADDRESS
The IP address specified for the print server (through BOOTP) is an invalid
IP address for specifying a single node. Check your Bootptab file for proper
entries.
43
INVALID SUBNET MASK
The IP subnet mask specified for the print server (through BOOTP) is an
invalid subnet mask. Check your Bootptab file for proper entries.
44
INVALID GATEWAY
ADDRESS
The default gateway IP address specified for the print server (through
BOOTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your
Bootptab file for proper entries.
45
INVALID SYSLOG ADDRESS
The syslog server IP address specified for the print server (through
BOOTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your
Bootptab file for proper entries.
Error Code and Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
212 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
46
INVALID SERVER ADDRESS
The TFTP server IP address specified for the print server (through BOOTP)
is an invalid IP address for specifying a single node. Check your Bootptab
file for proper entries.
47
INVALID TRAP DEST
ADDRESS
One of the SNMP trap (Trap PDU) destination IP addresses specified for
the print server (through TFTP) is an invalid IP address for specifying a
single node. Check your TFTP configuration file.
48
CF ERR - FILE
INCOMPLETE
The TFTP configuration file contained an incomplete last line that did not
end in a new line character.
49
CF ERR - LINE TOO LONG
A line being processed in the TFTP configuration file was longer than the
print server could accept.
4A
CF ERR - UNKNOWN
KEYWORD
A TFTP configuration file line contained an unknown keyword.
4B
CF ERR - MISSING
PARAMETER
A line in the TFTP configuration file was missing a required parameter.
4C
CF ERR - INVALID
PARAMETER
A line in the TFTP configuration file contained an invalid value for one of the
parameters on that line.
4D
CF ERR - ACCESS LIST
EXCEEDED
The TFTP configuration file specified too many access list entries using the
“allow:” keyword.
4E
CF ERR - TRAP LIST
EXCEEDED
The TFTP configuration file specified too many trap destination list entries
using the “trap-destination:” keyword.
4F
TFTP REMOTE ERROR
The TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the host to the print server
failed with the remote host sending a TFTP ERROR packet to the print
server.
50
TFTP LOCAL ERROR
The TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the host to the print server
failed with the local print server encountering some form of inactivity
timeout or excessive retransmissions situation.
51
TFTP RETRIES EXCEEDED
The overall retrying of the TFTP transfer of the configuration file from the
host to the print server has exceeded a retry limit.
Error Code and Message Description
EN Interpreting the configuration page 213
52
BAD BOOTP/DHCP REPLY
An error was detected in the BOOTP or DHCP reply that the print server
received. The reply either had insufficient data in the UDP datagram to
contain the minimum BOOTP/DHCP header of 236 bytes, had an operation
field that was not BOOTPREPLY(0X02), had a header field that did not
match the print server’s hardware address, or had a UDP source port that
was not the BOOTP/DHCP server port (67/udp).
53
BAD BOOTP TAG SIZE
The tagsize in a vendor-specific field in the BOOTP reply is either 0, or
greater than the remaining number of unprocessed bytes in the
vendor-specified area.
54
BOOTP/RARP IN PROGRESS
The print server is currently in the process of obtaining its basic IP
configuration information through BOOTP/RARP.
55
BOOTP/DHCP IN PROGRESS
The print server is currently in the process of obtaining its basic IP
configuration information through BOOTP/DHCP, and has not detected any
errors.
56
DHCP NAK
The print server received a negative acknowledgment message from the
DHCP server in response to a configuration request.
57
UNABLE TO CONNECT DHCP
SVR
The print server had received IP parameters from a DHCP server, but
communication with the DHCP server has been lost. Check status of the
DHCP server.
If an infinite lease was assigned, the print server will use the IP address of
the most recent DHCP server used, but operation may be degraded until a
DHCP server responds.
58
POSTSCRIPT MODE NOT
SELECTED
The printer does not support AppleTalk or AppleTalk extensions.
59
INCOMPLETE F/W - MUST
DOWNLOAD
Firmware download message. Currently downloading firmware to the print
server, or the download did not complete properly.
5A
TURN PRINTER OFF/ON
Firmware download message. Download of firmware is complete. Power
cycle the print server.
83 DISCONNECTING FROM
SERVER
The server has been shut down because of a configuration change or reset
request. This message automatically clears after a few seconds, unless the
printer is off line, is in an error state, or is servicing another I/O port or
another network protocol.
F1
TRYING TO CONNECT TO
SERVER
The print server is trying to connect to the NetWare server(s). This is a
normal message. Wait until either the connection is established or another
status message appears.
Error Code and Message Description
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
214 16 Troubleshooting network problems EN
Browse hp.com
General Information (http://www.hp.com/support/net printing)
(The central location on HP’s web site for the HP Jetdirect print servers and similar products)
Online Customer Forum (http://www.hp.com/go/forums)
(The central location on HP’s web site for the HP Jetdirect print servers and similar products)
Customer Support (http://www.hp.com/support/support_assistance)
(Lists all of the support options offered by HP and contact information such as phone numbers and
e-mail addresses)
For more information specific to the 310x print server, see the HP support web site for the HP
LaserJet 3300 series:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj3300 (site is in English)
EN 215
Glossary
Term Definition
10-BaseT A type of Ethernet network that uses twisted pair cabling to attach nodes
to the network.
100-BaseTx A type of Ethernet network, also known as Fast Ethernet, that uses
twisted pair cabling to attach nodes to the network.
10/100-BaseTx This term indicates that a product is compatible with both 10-BaseT and
100-BaseTx. Many network products are compatible with both of these,
including some HP Jetdirect print server models.
1284-B 1284 is a parallel port standard developed by IEEE (the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers). 1284-B refers to a specific
connector type on the end of the parallel cable which attaches to the
peripheral (for example, a printer). A 1284-B connector is bigger than a
1284-C connector, for example.
actual size The size of the page when it was scanned (not enlarged using zoom in or
reduced using zoom out).
ADF Automatic document feeder. The ADF is used to automatically feed
originals into the product for copying, scanning, or faxing.
annotation A word, note, mark, or highlighting added to an item.
appletalk An inexpensive local area network architecture built into all Apple
Macintosh computers.
bit depth The number of bits used to process scanned images. The greater the
number of bits, the more levels of gray that can be used to display the
image.
.bmp file A Microsoft Windows bitmap file that has the extension .bmp. A bitmap file
defines an image (such as the image of a scanned page) as a pattern of
dots (pixels).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
216 Glossary EN
BNC A type of network connector generally used with coaxial network cabling.
A BNC connector has two slots that lock onto two matching knobs on a
network interface card when the connector can be twisted.
BOOTP Short for Bootstrap Protocol, an Internet protocol that enables a diskless
workstation to discover its own IP address, the IP address of a BOOTP
server on the network, and a file to be loaded into memory to boot the
machine. This enables the workstation to boot without requiring a hard or
floppy disk drive. The protocol is defined by RFC 951.
brightness A measure of the overall intensity of the image. The lower the brightness
value, the darker the image; the higher the value, the lighter the image will
be.
browser Short for Web browser, a software application used to locate and display
Web pages.
Chooser The Chooser is part of the Mac OS that allows configuration of the
computer system to print on any printer with the appropriate software.
Users that are part of an AppleTalk network system can use the Chooser
to activate and select among devices (such as printers, file servers, or
other computers) connected to the network.
client-server A network architecture in which each computer or process on the network
is either a client or a server. Servers are powerful computers or processes
dedicated to managing disk drives, network traffic, and printers. Clients
are PCs or workstations on which users run applications. Clients rely on
servers for resources such as files and devices.
collapse The process of reducing a sticky note to an icon.
collate The process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collate is
selected, the HP LaserJet 3300 series product prints an entire set before
printing additional copies. Otherwise, the device prints the desired
number of copies of a page together before printing the following pages.
comma (,) A comma in a dial sequence indicates that the fax machine will pause at
that point in the dialing sequence.
contrast The difference between the dark and light areas of an image. The lower
the number value, the more closely the shades will resemble each other.
The higher the number, the more the shades will stand out from each
other.
container program A program into which an OLE object is inserted. That program contains
the object.
crop To remove part of an image. The portion of the image that is selected
remains, while the portion that is not selected is removed.
.dcx A multi-page .PCX format where each page is a .PCX file. Since this is a
multi-page format, it is widely used for receiving and sending faxes to and
from the computer. A single DCX document can store up to 1,023 pages.
dedicated line A single telephone line that is used exclusively for either voice calls or fax
calls.
EN 217
DHCP Short for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, a protocol for assigning
dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network. With dynamic addressing,
a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the
network. In some systems, the device’s IP address can even change while
it is still connected. DHCP also supports a mix of static and dynamic IP
addresses.
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the
software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an
administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can
be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a
unique IP address.
DIMMs Dual In-line Memory Module, a small circuit board that holds memory. A
single in-line memory module (SIMM) has a 32-bit path to the memory,
whereas a DIMM has a 64-bit path.
distinctive ring A feature offered by some telephone companies in Australia, Canada,
New Zealand, the United States, and the United Kingdom that allows two
or three phone numbers to be set up on the same telephone line. Each
phone number has a different ring pattern, and the fax machine can be
configured to recognize the distinctive ring of the fax number.
DLC Short for Data Link Control. Every network interface card has a DLC
address or DLC identifier that uniquely identifies the node on the network.
dots per inch (dpi) A measurement of resolution used for scanning and printing. Generally,
more dots per inch mean a higher resolution, a greater amount of visible
detail in the image, and a larger file size.
EconoMode EconoMode is a toner-saving feature on the HP LaserJet product.
EconoMode reduces the amount of toner on a printed page, so that the
print cartridge lasts longer. The printed result is similar to printing a
document in draft mode.
ECP Extended capabilities port, a parallel-port standard for PCs that supports
bi-directional communication between the PC and attached devices (such
as a printer).
e-mail (electronic mail) An abbreviation for electronic mail. Software that can be used to
electronically transmit items over a communications network.
embedded An object created with one application and embedded into a document
created by another application. Embedding the object, rather than simply
inserting it by pasting it, ensures that the object retains its original format.
The embedded object can be modified with the original program. In
Windows environments, embedding objects is made possible by a
technology called OLE.
Ethernet A common type of local area network recognized as the industry
standard. Ethernet is also known as IEEE 802.3. Information is broken
into “packets” that are transmitted in order until they arrive at the
destination without colliding with any other “packet.” A network node is
either transmitting or receiving a packet at any instant.
expand A process to restore a collapsed sticky note from an icon to its original
size.
fax An abbreviation for facsimile. The electronic encoding of a printed page
and the transmission of the electronic page over a telephone line. The
product software can send items to electronic fax programs, which require
a modem and fax software.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
218 Glossary EN
fax functions Fax-related tasks done from the control panel that only affect the current
job, or are only done once before returning to the Ready state, such as
clearing memory. These functions are in their own section in the control
panel menu.
fax settings Fax-related items that, when set or changed, continue to use the choice
made until changed again. An example would be the number of times set
for the product to redial a busy number. These settings are in their own
section of the control panel menu.
file format The way the contents of a file are structured by a program or group of
programs.
.ftp File Transfer Protocol, the protocol used on the Internet for sending files.
.gif Graphics Interchange Format, an image used by CompuServe and other
online formats.
grayscale Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image. Color
images can also be converted to grayscale where colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas
consist of a smaller number of dots.
.hpd .HPD files are scanned documents that are saved using the HP LaserJet
Document Manager.
HP Jetdirect print server An external, standalone print server. To use the HP LaserJet 3300 series
product on the network, the product (or a printer) can be connected to the
print server, instead of a computer, using a parallel cable. The print server
then connects to the network using a standard network connector. For the
HP LaserJet 3300 series product and its supported HP Jetdirect external
print servers, the connector can be 10-BaseT, 10/100BaseTx, BNC, or
token ring.
HP LaserJet Director
toolbar An HP LaserJet 3300 series product software screen used when working
with documents. When the document is loaded into the document feeder
tray and the computer is connected directly to the product, the HP
LaserJet Director appears on the computer screen, allowing faxing,
copying, or scanning of the document to begin.
HP Web JetAdmin
software Network peripheral management software allows configuration and
management from a computer of any peripheral connected to an
HP Jetdirect print server. For the HP LaserJet 3300 series product, the
HP JetAdmin or Web JetAdmin software (or BOOTP, DHCP, or telnet) may
or may not need to be used to configure the product on the network.
hub A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly
used to connect segments of a LAN. A hub contains multiple ports. When
a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that all
segments of the LAN can see all packets.
hypertext links A link from one part of a document to another. When a linked word or
phrase or graphic is clicked, the user will jump to the linked word, phrase,
or graphic.
intranet A network based on TCP/IP protocols (an internet) belonging to an
organization, accessible only by the organization’s members, employees,
or others with authorization. An intranet’s Web sites look and act just like
any other Web sites, but the firewall surrounding an intranet fends off
unauthorized access. Intranets are used to share information internally
within an organization.
EN 219
IP address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks
using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the
destination.
IPP The Internet Printing Protocol defines the protocol for end users’ most
common printing situations over the Internet. The IPP allows users to: find
out about a printer’s capabilities, submit print jobs to a printer, find out the
status of the printer, and cancel a previously submitted job.
IPX/SPX A network protocol made popular by Novell, Inc. as the basic protocol in
its Novell NetWare network operating system. In order for the HP LaserJet
3300 series product to work on the network, the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX
network protocol must be running.
.jpg (also JPEG) Joint Photographic Experts Group, an international standard
for compressing digital photographic images.
LED Light emitting diode, an electronic device that lights up when electricity is
passed through it. LEDs are usually red. They are good for displaying
images because they can be relatively small, and they do not burn out.
However, they require more power than LCDs.
link A connection to a program or device that can be used to send information
from the product software to other programs, such as e-mail, electronic
fax, and OCR links.
Link Bar The icons on the bottom of the desktop or viewer that represent programs
installed on a computer, such as e-mail software.
linked program A program installed on a computer that can be used with the product
software. For example, OCR software can be used to translate a scanned
item into text.
NetWare Novell, Inc.’s proprietary networking operating system for the PC
environment. NetWare uses the IPX/SPX or TCP/IP network protocols. It
supports MS-DOS, Microsoft Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, and Unix
clients.
node A computer (server or user) or peripheral, such as the HP LaserJet 3300
series product, that is connected to a network.
Optical Character
Recognition (OCR)
software
OCR software converts an electronic image of text, such as a scanned
document, into a form that word processor, spreadsheet, and database
programs can use.
parallel cable See 1284-B.
.pcx A common graphic file format that many graphic programs accept. This is
a popular format in which to store scanned images.
peer-to-peer A type of network architecture in which each workstation has equivalent
capabilities and responsibilities. Peer-to-peer networks are generally
simple, but they usually do not offer the same performance as
client-server architectures.
portable document viewer A mini-program that can be attached to an electronic document and
e-mailed. The recipient will be able to view, annotate, and print the
document, no matter what program was used to create the document.
PostScript fonts Fonts defined in terms of the PostScript language, intended to be printed
on a PS printer. PostScript fonts come as a screen font that appears on
the monitor and a matching printer font used by the product to create
documents.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
220 Glossary EN
PPD PPD stands for PostScript Printer Description file. PPDs are used by the
printer driver and applications to determine the features and PostScript
commands supported in the product.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
print server See HP Jetdirect print server.
printer driver A printer driver is a program that enables applications to access a
product’s features. A printer driver translates an application’s formatting
commands (such as page breaks and font selection) into a printer
language (such as PostScript, PS, or PCL), and then sends the print file to
the product.
(The PD printer driver emulates Adobe PostScript® Level2. PostScript is a
registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.)
Private Branch Exchange
(PBX) A small telephone switching system that typically is used by large
businesses or universities to connect all telephone extensions within the
organization. A PBX also connects to the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) and may be either manual or dial, depending on the
method used by extensions to place incoming or outgoing calls. Normally,
the equipment is owned by the customer rather than leased from the
telephone company.
public switched telephone
network (PSTN) The worldwide dial-up telephone network or a portion of that network.
Users are assigned unique phone numbers, which allow them to connect
to the PSTN through local telephone exchange companies. Often, this
phrase is used when referring to data or other non-telephone services
carried over a path initially established using normal telephone signaling
and ordinary switched long distance telephone circuits.
resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in dots per inch (dpi). The higher
the dpi, the greater the resolution.
RJ45 A network connector that looks much like a standard telephone connector,
except it is wider (it houses 8 wires instead of 4). Both Ethernet
(10/100Base-Tx) and Token Ring networks use this type of network
connector.
shared line A single telephone line that is used for both voice and fax calls.
sticky note An annotation that is a multiline, resizable note. Similar to a paper sticky
note, it covers the item information beneath it. A sticky note can be moved
or collapsed to an icon. Words can be searched for in a sticky note by
using the Find command.
surge protector A device that protects a power supply and communications lines from
electrical surges. All computers come with some surge protection built
into the power supply, but it is a good idea to purchase a separate device.
summary information Information about the item, such as creator or keywords, can be added to
an item in the Summary Information dialog box to help find the item
quickly.
TCP/IP The de facto standard Ethernet protocol. TCP/IP stands for Transmission
Control Protocol over Internet Protocol. In order for the HP LaserJet 3300
series product to work on the network, the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network
protocol must be running.
.tif Tagged Image File Format, a .tif (or TIFF) is a graphic file format that was
developed to capture scanned images. It is a format used on
IBM-compatible computers, Macintosh computers, and UNIX computers.
Many graphic programs accept the .tif file format.
EN 221
token ring A local area network in which transmission conflicts are avoided by the
granting of “tokens” that give permission to send. A network node keeps
the token while transmitting a message, if it has a message to transmit,
and then passes the token on to the next node. IEEE 802.5 is the most
common type of token ring network.
TrueType fonts TrueType fonts use what-you-see-is-what-you-get (WYSIWYG)
technology, which means that the printed output of TrueType fonts is
identical to what appears on the screen.
TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. Using a
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can
be initiated from within the program.
twisted pair A type of network cable commonly used in Ethernet networks.
URL Uniform resource locator, the global address of documents and resources
on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where
the resource is located.
USB cable Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc. to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike
the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single
computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
watermarks A watermark adds background text to a document being printed. For
example, “Confidential” can be printed in the background text of a
document stating that the document is “Confidential.” A selection can be
made from a set of predefined watermarks, and the font, size, angle, and
style can be changed, as well as a determination made whether the
printer will place the watermark on the first page only or all pages.
Windows sharing A method of peer-to-peer networking that uses Windows products with a
network installed, resources can be shared with co-workers, most
commonly the HP LaserJet 3300 series product, printers, and hard disks,
by simply using Windows tools such as Explorer and Print Manager.
When the HP LaserJet 3300 series product (or any printer) is shared
using Windows sharing, network users need to install the printer drivers
using the Add Printers utility in the Windows Printers folder.
workgroup A collection of individuals working together on a task. Workgroup
computing occurs when all the individuals have computers connected to a
network that allows them to share data files, send e-mail to one another,
and schedule meetings.
zoom in To make a page larger on the screen so more details can be seen.
zoom out To make a page smaller on the screen so a broader view of the page can
be seen.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
222 Glossary EN
EN 223
Appendix A
Specifications and regulatory
information
See these sections for specifications and regulatory information on the following products:
●HP LaserJet 3300 series product
●HP LaserJet 3330 fax
●HP Jetdirect 310x print server
●Environmental product stewardship program
●HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
224 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
HP LaserJet 3300 series product
●HP LaserJet 3300 series product specifications
●Laser safety statement
HP LaserJet 3300 series product specifications
Environmental specifications
Operating environment Printer plugged into an AC outlet:
●Temperature: 15 to 32.5° C (59 to 90.5° F)
●Relative Humidity: 10 to 80% (no condensation)
Storage environment Printer unplugged from an AC outlet:
●Temperature: -20°C to 40°C (-4°F to 104°F)
●Relative Humidity: Less than 95% (no condensation)
Acoustics
Noise level During copying*: 6.6 Bels sound power level (per ISO 9296)
●Sound pressure level (bystander position): 50 dB
●Sound pressure level (operator position): 59 dB
During standby and sleep mode: silent
* During other operations, acoustic results may vary.
Electrical specifications
Power requirements ●110 to 127 volts +/-10%, 50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz (for 110 volt units)
●220 to 240V +/-10%, 50 to 60 Hz +/-2 Hz (for 220 volt units)
Power consumption ●During copying: 330 Watts (maximum)
●During printing: 300 Watts (maximum)
●During standby and power save: 14 Watts (maximum)
●Off: 0 Watts
EN HP LaserJet 3300 series product 225
Physical specifications
Dimensions ●Width: 546.1 mm (21.5 inches)
●Depth: 520.7 mm (20.5 inches)
●Height: 495.3 mm (19.5 inches)
Weight ●Models with ADF: 15.8 kg (34.6 lbs)
●Models without ADF: 14.1 kg (31.01 lbs)
Printer capacities and ratings
Print speed ●15 pages per minute for letter size paper and 14 pages per minute for
A4 size paper
●First page out in less than 10 seconds
Main input tray capacity 250 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper or up to 30 envelopes
Priority input tray capacity 10 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper or 1 envelope
Output bin capacity Up to 125 sheets of regular weight 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
Minimum paper size 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)
Maximum paper size 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Media weight ●Output bin – 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
●Straight through media path – 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs)
Base memory 8 MB of ROM/Flash and 32 MB of RAM
Upgrade memory expansion One DIMM slot available for an 8, 16, 32, or 64 MB RAM DIMM
Print resolution 1,200 dots per inch (dpi)
Duty cycle ●10,000 single-sided pages per month (maximum)
●1,000 single-sided pages per month (average)
PCL Level 5e and 6
PostScript Emulates Adobe PostScript® Level2
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated
Copier capacities and ratings
Copy speed Up to 15 pages per minute
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
226 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Laser safety statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance
is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This printer is certified as a “Class 1”
laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Multiple copies Up to 99 per job
Copy reduction or enlargement 25 to 400%
Acoustic emissions (per ISO
9296) while copying 6.6 Bel sound power level
Scanner capacities and ratings
Margins for scanned items 3.05 mm (0.12 inch) left, 6.2 mm (0.248 inch) right
4.06 mm (0.16 inch) top and bottom
Scanner Duty Cycle 2,000 single-sided items per month
Scan resolution 600 PPI color
ADF specifications
Input capacity Up to 50 sheets of flat 16 lb or 20 lb (60-75 g/m2) media
Media weight 16 lb (60 g/m2) to 24 lb (90 g/m2)
Media size 127 by 127 mm (5 by 5 inches) to 215.9 mm by 381 mm (8.5 by 15 inches)
Speed Up to 11 pages per minute for Letter/A4 size
Duty cycle 1,000 pages per month
Memory specifications
DIMMs 100 pin, 66 MHz minimum speed
Port availability
USB 1.1
Parallel ●IEEE 1284-B level 2 device with an IEEE 1284-B receptacle
●Set host computer to ECP
EN HP LaserJet 3300 series product 227
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since
radiation emitted inside this printer is completely confined within protective housings and external
covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this
manual can result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Note Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
228 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Declaration of Conformity
The following Declaration of Conformity complies with ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014. It
identifies the product, manufacturer’s name and address, and applicable specifications recognized
in the European community.
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021 USA
declares that the product
Product Name: LaserJet 3300/3310/3320/3330 Series
Model Number: C9124A, C9125A, C9126A, C9151A, C9709A
(including Model C9143A ADF Accessory)
Product Options: ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 60950:1991+A1:1992+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1996 /
EN 60950:1992+A1:1993 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1997 + A11:1997
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997/
EN 60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 Class 1 Laser/LED Product
EMC: CISPR 22:1993 + A1:1995 + A2:1996 /
EN 55022:1994 + A1:1995 + A2:1997 Class B1)
EN 61000-3-2:1995+A14:2000
EN 61000-3-3:1995
EN55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B2) / ICES-002, Issue 2
AS / NZS 3548:1995 + A1 + A2:1997
TELECOM3) TBR-21:1998; EG 201 121:1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive
89/336/EEC and carries the CE-marking accordingly.3)
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2) This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
3) LaserJet 3330 (Model C9126A) contains fax functionality and is therefore compliant with the referenced telecom
standards and the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE-marking accordingly.
Boise, Idaho USA
August 14, 2001
Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia.
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE /
Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015
(Phone: 208-396-6000)
EN HP LaserJet 3300 series product 229
Canada DOC regulations
This equipment complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.
<< CEM>>.
Laser statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 3300-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas
för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 3300-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi
ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa
lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman
erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
230 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Korean EMI statement
Japan VCCI Class B regulations
HP LaserJet 3330 fax
HP LaserJet 3330 product fax specifications
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US)
Telephone consumer protection act (US)
IC CS-03 requirements
Regulatory information for EU countries
HP LaserJet 3330 product fax specifications
Fax transmission speed 3 seconds/page (ITU-T Test Image #1)
Right/left margins for printed pages 6.3 mm (0.25 inch)
Top/bottom margins for printed pages 5.08 mm (0.2 inch)
Fax compatibility ITU Group 3; ECM
Fax coding schemes MH, MR, and MMR
Modem speed Up to 33,600 bits per second (bps)
Speed dialing Yes
Distinctive ring detect Ye s
EN HP LaserJet 3330 fax 231
FCC Part 68 Requirements (US)
This equipment complies with FCC rules, Part 68. On the back of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone
company. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in
response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed
five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined
by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling
area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone
company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. If this
equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice isn't
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone
company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted
service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in the front of this
manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until
the problem is resolved. The following repairs can be done by the customer: Replace any original
equipment that came with the product. This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and
bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC
surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the
equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
Telephone consumer protection act (US)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a
computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such
message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first
page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or
such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900
number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission
charges.) In order to program this information into your facsimile, please see Setting the
information in the fax header.
Fax resolution (standard) 203 by 98 dots per inch (dpi)
Fax resolution (fine) 203 by 196 dpi
Fax resolution (superfine) 300 by 300 dpi (no halftone)
Fax resolution (photo) 300 by 300 dpi (halftone enabled)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
232 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
IC CS-03 requirements
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement
document(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s
satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the
equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in
some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if
present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) of this device is 0.7.
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed
five (5.0). The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with
direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A.
Regulatory information for EU countries
This equipment has been designed to work in all of the countries of the European Economic Area
(Public Switched Telephone Networks) only. Network compatibility is dependent on internal
software settings. Contact your equipment supplier if it is necessary to use the equipment on a
different telephone network. For further product support, contact Hewlett-Packard at the phone
numbers provided in the support flyer that came with the product.
HP Jetdirect 310x print server
HP Jetdirect 310x print server specifications
FCC compliance
Declaration of Conformity
Australia
Canada
Japan VCCI Class B regulations
Korean EMI statement
Chinese safety statement
manuals4you.com
EN HP Jetdirect 310x print server 233
HP Jetdirect 310x print server specifications
Supported networks
Physical ●Supports unshielded or shielded twisted pair cabling, using an RJ-45
connector for:
•IEEE 802.3i 10Base-T (Ethernet)
•IEEE 802.3u 100Base-Tx (Fast Ethernet)
●Requires a 10/100Base-Tx network hub or concentrator that supports
link beat (link test pulse) signals.
Supported network operating
systems and protocols
●Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 2000, ME, and XP (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)
●Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 and later (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, DLC/LLC)
●Apple Macintosh OS 8.6 and later (EtherTalk)
●Novell NetWare v 3.11, 3.12, 4.x, 5.0 (IPX/SPX); NDS (IPX/SPX);
NDPS (IPX/SPX)
●IBM OS/2 Warp v 3.0, 4.0 (TCP/IP), DLC/LLC)
●HP-UX 10.x, 11.x; Solaris v2.5x, 2.6; SCO UNIX v86, 3.2, 4.2, 5.0; IBM
AIX v3.2.5 and later; MPE-ix v5.5 (TCP/IP)
●Artisoft LANtastic 7.0 (DLC/LLC)
●Line Printer Daemon (LPD)
Physical specifications
Interfaces ●Network
See network specifications above
●USB
Female “A” connector, complies with USB version 1.1 specifications
Dimensions ●Width: 97 mm (3.8 inches) with clip attached, 92 mm (3.6 inches)
excluding clip and connectors
●Length: 129 mm (5.1 inches)
●Height: 45 mm (1.8 inches) with clip attached, 36 mm (1.4 inches)
excluding clip and connectors
Weight ●108 g (3.9 oz.)
Environmental specifications
Operating environment ●Temperature: 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
●Relative humidity: 15% to 95% at 40°C (104°F)
●Altitude: 4.6 km
Storage environment ●Temperature: -40°C to 70°C (-6°F to 158°F)
●Relative humidity: 90% at 65°C (149°F)
●Altitude: 4.6 km
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
234 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Electrical specifications
Power requirements ●Input voltage
•310x – 13 VDC
•Power module – (see Power modules (network model only))
●Nominal output voltage
•310x – N/A
•Power module – 13 VDC
●Input current
•310x – 140 mA @ 13 V
•Power module – 100 mA (depending on your particular power
module)
●Maximum output current
•310x – N/A
•Power module – 300 mA
●Frequency range
•310x – DC
•Power module – 50/60 Hz (depending on your particular power
module)
Power consumption ●310x – 1.8 W
●Power module – 1.2 W
Electromagnetic immunity
Statement See Declaration of Conformity.
Electromagnetic emissions
Regulations ●US: FCC Part 15, Class B
●Canada: ICES-003 (B)
●Japan: VCCI Class 1
●Europe: CISPR-22/EN55022 Class B
●Taiwan: CNS 13438
●Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 3548
●Russia: GOST 292116
Safety
Compliance The HP Jetdirect 310x print server complies with the following safety
regulations:
●IEC 950: (1991)+A1, A2, A3, A4/EN60950 (1992)+A1, A2, A3, A4, A11
●UL 1950
●CSA 950
●NOM-019-SCFI-1994, NOM-001-SCFI-1993
EN HP Jetdirect 310x print server 235
FCC compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located.
●Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that my cause undesired operation.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
236 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Declaration of Conformity
This Declaration of Conformity complies with ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014. It identifies the
product, manufacturer’s name and address, and applicable specifications recognized in the
European community.
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014
Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer's Address: 8000 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, CA 95747-5677 USA
declares that the product
Product Name: HP Jetdirect 310x External Print Server
Model Number: J6038A
Product Operations: All
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: EN60950 (1992) +A1,A2,A3,A4,AII / IEC 950 (1991) +A1,A2,A3,A4
EN60825-1 (1994) / IEC 825-1 (1993), Class 1 (Laser/LED)
GB 4943 (1998)
EMC: EN 55022 (1998) / CISPR-22 (1997) Class B
GB 9254 (1988)
EN 55024 (1998)
IEC 61000-4-2 (1995); EN 61000-4-2 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-3 (1995); EN 61000-4-3 (1996)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1995); EN 61000-4-4 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-5 (1995); EN 61000-4-5 (1995)
IEC 61000-4-6 (1996); EN 61000-4-6 (1996)
IEC 61000-4-8 (1993); EN 61000-4-8 (1993)
IEC 61000-4-11 (1994); EN 61000-4-11 (1994)
EN61000-3-2:1995 / EN61000-3-2 (1995)+A14
EN61000-3-3:1994 / EN61000-3-3 (1995)
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive
89/336/EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly.
This product was tested in a typical configurations with Hewlett-Packard Co. products.
Roseville, July 18, 2001
Mark Vigeant, Product Regulations Manager
European Contact: Your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department
TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX:+49-7031-14-3143).
EN HP Jetdirect 310x print server 237
Australia
This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements.
Canada
This equipment complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques.
<< CEM>>.
Japan VCCI Class 1 regulations
Korean EMI statement
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
238 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
Chinese safety statement
manuals4you.com
EN Environmental product stewardship program 239
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our
environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Energy consumption
Energy usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. This product qualifies for
ENERGY STAR®, which is a voluntary program to encourage the development of energy-efficient
office products.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined this product meets
ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see
http://www.energystar.gov/
Toner consumption
EconoMode/Toner Miser uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print
cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s manual duplex feature (two-sided printing, see Printing on both sides of the media
(manual duplexing)), and printing multiple pages on one page can reduce paper usage and the
resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the
ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (e.g., print cartridge, drum, fuser) can be
returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy to use
and free takeback program is available in over 48 countries. Multi-lingual program information and
instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and consumables package.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
240 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
HP printing supplies returns and recycling program information
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected more than 47
million used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded in the world's
landfills. The HP LaserJet print cartridges and consumables are collected and bulk shipped to our
resource and recovery partners who disassemble the cartridge. After a thorough quality
inspection, selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials are
separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful
products.
US returns
For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and consumables, HP
encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the
single, pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information,
visit the HP LaserJet Supplies web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle
Non-US returns
Non-US customers should call the local HP Sales and Service Office or visit the
http://www.hp.com/go/recycle web site for further information regarding availability of the HP
Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in
the Print Media Guide. See Product media specifications for more information. This product is
suitable for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309.
Material restrictions
This HP product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp, scanner, or liquid crystal display that
may require special handling at end-of-life.
This HP product contains lead in solder.
The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product have the following
specifications:
For recycling information, you can contact www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local authorities
or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.
Material safety data sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies web
site at http://www.hp.com/go/msds.
Type: Lithium Carbon Monofluoride (solid button cell)
Weight: approx. 1 gram
Location: on formatter PC board (one battery per product)
User Removable: No
EN HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery 241
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware product and all HP-supplied internal
components. The hardware maintenance covers a three-year period from date of the HP product
purchase. The customer must purchase HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product
purchase. For more information, contact the HP Customer Care Service and Support group. See
the support flyer that came with your product for information about contacting HP.
Spare parts and consumables availability
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be available for at least five years after
production has stopped.
For more information
On HP’s environmental programs, including:
●Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●HP’s commitment to the environment
●HP’s environmental management system
●HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●Material Safety Data Sheets
See: http://www.hp.com/go/environment or
http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/
HP LaserJet 3300 series product battery
Battery material Poly-carbon Monoflouride Lithium
Battery type Button/coin cell battery
Quantity per product 1
Weight Approximately 1 gram
Lithium type Solid
Battery manufacturers Rayovac, Madison, WI, USA; and Panasonic, Secaucus, NJ, USA.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
242 Appendix A Specifications and regulatory information EN
EN HP software license agreement 243
Appendix B
Warranties and licensing
Use thse topics to find out about product warantee and license information.
●HP software license agreement
●HP limited warranty statement
HP software license agreement
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE
TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, YOU CAN
RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH
ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU CAN RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL
REFUND.
HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS
The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying software unless you have a
separate signed agreement with HP.
License Grant. HP grants you a license to use one copy of the software. “Use” means storing,
loading, installing, executing, or displaying the software. You may not modify the software or
disable any licensing or control features of the software. If the software is licensed for “concurrent
use,” you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to use the software
concurrently.
Ownership. The software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your license
confers no title to, or ownership in, the software and is not a sale of any rights in the software. HP’s
third party suppliers can protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms.
Copies and Adaptations. You may only make copies or adaptations of the software for archival
purposes or when copying or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the software.
You must reproduce all copyright notices in the original software on all copies or adaptations. You
may not copy the software onto any public network.
No Disassembly or Decryption. You may not disassemble or decompile the software unless HP’s
prior written consent is obtained.
In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required for limited disassembly or decompilation.
Upon request, you will provide HP with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly
or decompilation. You may not decrypt the software unless decryption is a necessary part of the
operation of the software.
Transfer. Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the software. Upon transfer,
you must deliver the software, including any copies and related documentation, to the transferee.
The transferee must accept these License Terms as a condition to the transfer.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
244 Appendix B Warranties and licensing EN
Termination. HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of these
License Terms. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the software, together with all
copies, adaptations, and merged portions in any form.
Export Requirements. You may not export or reexport the software or any copy or adaptation in
violation of any applicable laws or regulations.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The software and any accompanying documentation have
been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial
computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May
1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a),
or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent
agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided
for such software and any accompanying documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause
or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved.
HP limited warranty statement
HP LaserJet 3300 product ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
1HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories, and supplies will
be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period
specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at
its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products
may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
2HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after
the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and
workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during
the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming
instructions due to such defects.
3HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP
is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as
warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the
product.
4HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have
been subject to incidental use.
5Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or
calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts, or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for
the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
6TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE
EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR
ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow
limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other
rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or province to province.
7HP’s limited warranty is valid in any country or locality where HP has a support presence for
this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you
receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit, or function of the
product to make it operate in a country for which it was never intended to function for legal or
regulatory reasons.
EN HP limited warranty statement 245
8TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED
ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT
LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION
TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT
TO YOU.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
246 Appendix B Warranties and licensing EN
EN Obtaining hardware service 247
Appendix C
Service and support
Use these topics to learn about obtaining product service and support.
●Obtaining hardware service
●Extended warranty
●Service information form
Obtaining hardware service
To obtain hardware service
If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, HP offers the following support options:
●HP repair services. You can return the product to an HP repair center, depending on your
location.
●Express Exchange. In some places, HP provides a reconditioned permanent replacement
product to you on the next working day.
●HP authorized service provider. You can return the unit to a local authorized service dealer.
●Express pick-up and delivery. HP will arrange to pick up the product, repair it, and return it
to you within 5 to 10 days, depending on your location.
Returning the unit
When shipping equipment, HP recommends insuring it. Also, include a copy of your proof of
purchase. Please also fill out the “Service information form” to ensure the most accurate repairs.
CAUTION Shipping damage resulting from inadequate packaging is the customer’s responsibility. See
Repackaging guidelines below.
Repackaging guidelines
●If possible, print a self-test page (see Printing a configuration page) before you turn off the
unit, and send the self-test report with the unit.
●Remove and retain the print cartridge.
CAUTION Toner left in the printer during shipping can damage the product.
●Include the completed copy of the service information form below. Note on the form which
items were returned.
●Use the original shipping container and packaging materials, if possible.
●Include samples that illustrate the problems you are having, if applicable.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
248 Appendix C Service and support EN
●Include five sheets of the paper or other media that are causing trouble in printing, scanning,
faxing, or copying.
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP product and all HP-supplied internal components.
The hardware maintenance covers a one- to-five year period from date of the HP product
purchase. The HP SupportPack can provide Express Exchange or onsite service. The customer
must purchase HP SupportPack within 180 days of the HP product purchase. Get more support
information from the following HP web site: http://www.hp.com/peripherals2/care_netlj/index.html
or contact the Customer Care Service and Support group; see the support flyer that came with
your product for the appropriate phone numbers and information.
Service information form
Service information form
Who is returning the equipment? Date:
Person to contact: Phone:
Alternate contact: Phone:
Return shipping address: Special shipping
instructions:
What is being sent? Model number: Serial number:
Please attach any relevant printouts when returning equipment. Do not ship accessories that
are not required to complete the repair (for example, media trays, manuals, and cleaning
supplies).
What needs to be done?
1. Describe the conditions of the failure (What was the failure? What were you doing when the
failure occurred? What software were you running? Can you make the failure reoccur?).
2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures?
3. Is the unit connected to any of the following? (Please provide manufacturer and model
numbers.)
Personal Computer: Modem: Network:
4. Additional comments:
EN Service information form 249
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
250 Appendix C Service and support EN
manuals4you.com
EN Index 251
Index
A
accessories and parts 144
acoustics specifications 224
activity logs, printing 101, 188
ad hoc groups, faxing to 82
ADF
pickup roller assembly, changing 133
specifications 141
adjusting
copy quality 56
languages, display panel 37
settings 36–39
volume 37
alarm volume, adjusting 37
alcohol, cleaning with 124
alphanumeric buttons 22
alternate long distance service, one-touch key 89
annotations
adding 74
changing settings 75
answer mode, changing 80, 96
answering machines, troubleshooting 183
archiving, scanned images 71
autoreduction, faxes 98
B
billing codes 100
blocked fax list, printing 104
blocking fax numbers 86
booklets, printing 53
BOOTP
configuring 115
Bootptab file entries 115
buttons
alphanumeric 22
control panel 21–23
C
cancel control 22
canceling
copy jobs 56
fax job 83
print jobs 42
scan jobs 68
card stock
printing 49
specifications 140
changing
contrast, fax 95
fax headers 80
print quality 43
ring patterns 97
settings, default 38
volume 37
characters
dropouts 160
misformed 163
cleaning
glass 124
lid backing 124
pickup roller 126
printer media path 126
codes
billing 100
group-dial 89
one-touch key 87
speed-dial 87
collating copies
changing defaults 59
changing settings 59
configuration report, printing 33
connecting, power cord 30
control panel
error messages 165
key press volume, adjusting 38
languages, changing 37
menu structure 34
programming one-touch keys 88
programming speed-dial codes 88
scan 66
control panel bezel, replacing 135
control panel components
alphanumeric buttons 22
copy, scan, and start controls 23
fax controls 21
menu, status, and cancel controls 22
copier capacities and ratings 225
copy quality
see also image quality, troubleshooting
adjusting 56
defaults, adjusting 57
copying
acoustic emissions 226
book 63
canceling 56
enlarging 58
multipage stack of 2-sided originals 62
quality, improving 168
reducing 58
speed 225
start 56
troubleshooting 168
curling, troubleshooting 164
customer support
form, service 248
hardware service 247
D
Declaration of Conformity 228
default settings
adjusting 38
restoring 36
defaults, restoring factory 36
deleting
faxes from memory 84
group-dial codes 90
one-touch keys 88
phone book entries 91
speed-dial codes 88
DHCP
using 118
dial prefix, inserting 92
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
252 Index EN
dial tone detection, changing 95
dialing
character table 91
manually 83
pulse, selecting 99
redialing manually 84
speed-dial codes and one-touch keys 87
tone detection 95
tone, selecting 99
dimensions, product 225
DIMM
installing 149
removing 151
specifications 226
testing installation or removal 148
drivers, printer, requirements for 42
dropouts, character 160
duplexing, manual 49
duty cycle
product 225
scanner 226
E
EconoMode 43
electrical specifications 224
electromagnetic emissions 234
embedded web server 113–114
enlarging, copies 58
envelopes
printing 45
specifications for 140
Environmental Product Stewardship Program 239
environmental specifications 26, 224
error messages 178
error messages, control panel 165
European Union regulatory information 232
Express Exchange repair service 247
extended warranty 248
extension phone 93
F
fax headers, changing 80
fax polling 93
fax reports
call reports, printing 102
fax logs, printing 101
first page thumbnail, including 103
fax sounds, adjusting volume 38, 94
faxes
canceling 83
contrast defaults, adjusting 95
delayed sending 84
deleting from memory 84
error correction settings 99
extension phone, receiving from 93
forwarding 93
printing incorrectly 187
receiving 85
receiving to computer 86
reprinting 85
resolution default, adjusting 95
stamping enabling 98
faxing
ad hoc groups 82
blocking or unblocking fax numbers 86
controls 21
error correction settings 99
extension phone, receiving from 93
forwarding 93
group-dial code 82
loading media 81
manual dialing 84
margins 230
multiple recipients 82
one recipient 81
resolution 231
sending 81–83
speed 230
troubleshooting 182–188
volume adjustments for 94
FCC regulations 227
features 14–19
forms
printing 48
service information 248
G
glossary of terms 215
gray backgrounds, troubleshooting 161
group-dial codes
deleting 90
programming 89
groups, faxing to 89
H
hardware components 20
hardware service 247
HP Jetdirect 310x
embedded web server 113
features 108
installing 111
operating environments 233
power requirements 234
print server components 23
specifications 233
supported networks and protocols 233
HP LaserJet 3300
features 14
package contents 14
HP LaserJet 3300se
features 15
package contents 15
HP LaserJet 3310
features 16
package contents 16
HP LaserJet 3320
features 17
package contents 17
HP LaserJet 3320n
features 18
package contents 18
HP LaserJet 3330
features 19
package contents 19
HP LaserJet Director, scanning with 68
HP LaserJet Document Manager, using 74
HP limited warranty statement 244
HP Photo Center 74
HP repair services 247
HP software license agreement 243
HP Web JetAdmin, using 114
humidity, operating environment 26
I
image enhancement, accessing 74
EN Index 253
image quality, troubleshooting
black dots 172, 180
blank copies 168
blank pages 180
characters, misformed 163
curl or wave 164
dropouts 160
faded images 168
faded print 160
faded stripes 171
graphics 176
gray backgrounds 161
light print 160
lines 161, 180
loose toner 162
missing images 168
repeating defects 162
skewed pages 163, 176
smears 162
specks 160
streaks 172, 180
incoming faxes, troubleshooting 185
input tray, paper
ADF input tray, installing 30
capacity, main 225
capacity, priority 225
installing and loading 29
J
jams
ADF, clearing 169
ADF, typical locations 169
clearing 158
preventing 159
K
key press volume, adjusting 38
keys, numeric
see dialing
L
labels
printing 47
specifications for 139
laser safety statement 226
letterhead, printing 48
license, software 243
lines, troubleshooting 185
loading
fax originals 81
originals 31–32
loose toner, troubleshooting 162
M
manual dialing 83
manual duplexing
heavy media 51
lightweight media 50
manual feed 42
margins
faxing 230
scanning 226
media
common problems 139
guidelines 138
sizes 138
specifications 138
troubleshooting 158
weight 225
memory
base 225
DIMM 226
specifications 226
upgrade expansion 225
menu control 22
menu structure, control panel 34
messages
alert 166
critical error 165
warning 166
modem speed 230
multiple pages, printing on single sheet 52
N
network
connecting to 111
connection requirements 109
moving to another 122
protocols, using 108
software, installing 113
noise level, copying 224
number of copies, changing 60
O
OCR (optical character recognition)
HP LaserJet Director 72
using 72
one-touch keys
deleting 88
programming 87
ordering
accessories 144
parts 144
output bin, capacity 225
P
package contents 14–19
page-by-page scanning 69
paper
see also media
see also special media
common problems 139
guidelines 138
size, maximum 225
size, minimum 225
sizes, default adjustments 37
specifications 138
Part 2
part numbers 144
parts and accessories 144
phone book entries, deleting 91
phone lines
fax tone volume, adjusting 38
splitters 183
troubleshooting 182
types of 182
physical specifications 225
pickup roller
changing 127
cleaning 126
port availability 226
power
consumption 224
requirements 224
power cord, connecting 30
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
254 Index EN
power module chart 146
power modules 145
print cartridge
cleaning 125
installing 28, 147
life expectancy 148
recycling 148
storing 147
print jobs, stopping 42
print quality
changing 43
settings 42
print server
configuration page, printing 122
printer
cable, connecting 27
capacities and ratings 225
drivers, requirements for 42
media path cleaning 126
separation pad, changing 129
printing
all fax reports 105
blocked fax list 104
canceling 42
configuration page 195
configuration report 33
control panel menu map 34, 36
envelopes 45
fax activity logs 101, 188
letterhead 48
print server configuration page 122
special media 45–49
speed 225
transparencies and labels 47
troubleshooting 154–166
watermarks 54
pulse dialing 99
R
receiving faxes
fax tones 85
to computer 86
troubleshooting 184
redial settings, changing 99
reducing, copies 58
repackaging guidelines 247
repeating defects, troubleshooting 162
reports
billing codes 103
fax call 102
phone book 103
T.30 protocol trace 104
reports, fax, printing all 105
reprinting faxes 85
resolution
fax default, changing 95
faxing 231
scanning 76, 226
resolution, print 225
returning the unit 247
ring pattern, changing 97
ring volume, adjusting 94
rings-to-answer, changing 96
S
safety, compliance 234
scan buttons 66–68
network connection 67
programming 68
programming destinations 67
USB or parallel connection 67
scanner capacities and ratings 226
scanning
book 63
cancel scan job 68
color 76
control panel key 66
e-mail 75
enhancing images 74
error messages 178
flatbed scanner preview 70
HP LaserJet Director 68
loading originals 31
margins 226
methods 66
OCR, using 72
page-by-page 69
photos 62
quality, improving 179
resolution 76
store scanned images 71
troubleshooting 176–180
TWAIN, using 70
sending faxes
ad hoc groups 82
delaying 84
dialing from a telephone 94
group-dial code 82
multiple recipients 82
one recipient 81
troubleshooting 183
V.34 setting, changing 100
service
hardware 247
information form 248
settings 36–39
silence-detect mode, changing 97
software
HP LaserJet Copier 60
HP LaserJet Copy Plus 61
special media
common problems 139
printing 45–49
specifications 139–141
specifications
acoustics 224
ADF 226
battery 241
copier capacities and ratings 225
electrical 224
environmental 26, 224
fax 230
media 138
memory 226
network connection 109
physical 225
print server 233
printer capacities and ratings 225
scanner capacities and ratings 226
speed-dial codes
deleting 88
programming 87
stamp received faxes, enabling 98
start scan button 68
statements
Declaration of Conformity 228
FCC Part 68 requirements 231
EN Index 255
FCC regulations 227
IC CS-03 requirements 232
laser safety 226
software license agreement 243
telephone consumer protection act 231
warranty 244
status control 22
storage, environment 224
storing, scanned images 71
support, customer
see customer support
surge protectors 183
T
temperature, operating environment 26
testing
copier with the ADF input tray 33
copier with the flatbed scanner 34
printer 33
text, prints poorly 176
tone dialing 99
toner
loose 162
smear 162
specks 160
transparencies
printing 47
specifications for 139
trays
see input tray, paper
troubleshooting
see also image quality, troubleshooting
answering machines 183
black dots 172, 180
blank pages 154, 168, 172, 180
characters, misformed 163
configuration page 195
copy output 168
copying 168–173
curled media 156
curling paper 164
dropouts 160
error messages 155, 178
faded print 160
fax phone problems 182
faxing 182–188
feeding problems 155, 183
graphics 157, 176
gray backgrounds 161
incoming faxes 185
light print 160
lines 161, 172, 180
loose toner 162
media guides 156
media jams 158
not responding 154, 155
paper 177
parallel ports 155
pickup roller 156
printer 154–166
printer separation pad 156
quality, image 176
repeating defects 162
scanning 176–180
size, reduced 173, 180
sizes, wrong 177
skewed pages 163, 176
skewed print 156
slow faxes 187
smears 162
specks 160, 165
streaks 172, 180
text problems 156, 172, 176, 177, 180
too dark 172, 180
too light 172, 180
volume 188
white lines 171
wrinkles 164
TWAIN
scanning with 70
U
unblocking fax numbers 86
V
V.34 setting, changing 100
voice message services 183
volume, adjusting 37
volume, troubleshooting 188
W
warranty 244
warranty, extended 248
watermarks, printing 54
weight
ADF media 226
media 225
product 225
wrinkling, troubleshooting 164
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
copyright © 2002
Hewlett-Packard Company
www.hp.com/support/lj3300
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com

Navigation menu